1_427.qxp 114877 Catalog
2014-09-27
: Pdf 114877-Catalog 114877-Catalog 782274 Batch8 unilog
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 168
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Industrial Control & Circuit Breakers Section C Innovative, intelligent NEC and IEC solutions safely and efficiently control power and protect circuits in explosive, wet, and corrosive environments worldwide. New Products in the Control Product Line Section • EGL Static Grounding Indicator 5C • EJB Custom Control Panels 5C • Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives 6C Notable changes to the Control section of this catalog • Section 4C reorganized to capture all traditional control stations • Section 5C reorganized to capture specialty control stations • New section 6C for explosionproof variable frequency drives • Section 8C has been removed. For Intrinsically Safe products, please visit Cooper Crouse-Hinds MTL Instruments at www.mtl-inst.com CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se C Industrial Control and Circuit Breakers Table of Contents Section C of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Product Catalog lists motor control, circuit breakers, variable frequency drives, and switchracks. Information on application, features, standard materials, standard finishes, size ranges, compliances, options, and accessories are presented for ease of product selection. C Information relating to product families in Section C is grouped as follows: Section 1C Section 5C Combination Motor Starters Specialty Control Stations (for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) Combination magnetic line starters and enclosures for across-theline motor starting, motor disconnect, motor and line protection, and start-stop operations. (for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) For means of remote and local motor control, visual indicators and circuit control and selection. Offers a selection of push buttons, pilot lights, selector switches. For hazardous areas EBMC EPC EJB Custom Control Panels EMP / EMPS EGL AFU / AFUX For non-hazardous areas NMC AFA / AFAX D2X EGF Section 2C Section 6C Motor Starters Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives (for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) Line starters and enclosures for manual and magnetic across-theline starting of motors, motor protection, and remote and manual starting and stopping. (for hazardous areas) Highly flexible AC drives designed specifically for hazardous area locations. These drives can be mounted next to the motor in the classified area, providing significant installation cost savings - along with the traditional VFD benefits of energy savings, speed and torque control, and system diagnostics. ACE Magnetic starters EBMS EPC NMG Manual starters EID GHG EFD NSSC EDS NFSC EMN NMN MC Section 7C Rack Assemblies (for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) For motor control centers in outdoor and/or hazardous areas. Section 3C Circuit Breakers (for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) For use in conjunction with variety of heating, lighting, and power circuits to provide disconnect means and short circuit protection. For hazardous areas For non-hazardous areas EBMB EFD EPC EIB FLB NCB For hazardous areas ERK DRK For non-hazardous areas WRK Section 4C Traditional Control Stations (for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) For means of remote and local motor control, visual indicators and circuit control and selection. Offers a selection of push buttons, pilot lights, selector switches. For hazardous areas FlexStation MC / MCC EDS / EDSC OAC EDSCM GHG43 DSD / DSD-SR N2SU / N2SCU EDS N2FA / N2FAC EDSCM N2S / N2SC EFS MC / MCC OAC 428 www.crouse-hinds.com For non-hazardous areas MC US: 1-866-764-5454 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 1C Combination Motor Starters Hazardous and Non-hazardous Areas Description Page No. Application/Selection see page 430 Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Single speed, non-reversing, with circuit breakers & disconnect switches EBMC Series see page 431 EPC Series see page 440 EBMC Series with Advantage* Starter see page 438 NMC Nonmetallic Series see page 444 1C Single speed, non-reversing, with motor circuit protectors EBMC Series see page 437 EPC Series see page 443 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se *Advantage is a trademark of Cutler-Hammer Inc. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 429 1C Combination Motor Starters Application and Quick Selector Chart Applications: Materials and Finishes: Combination line starters are housed in enclosures suitable for specific environments, and are used for: • Across-the-line starting of polyphase AC induction motors • Providing disconnect means • Branch circuit protection • Motor running protection • Remote starting and stopping • Standard material on EBMC and EPC Series is copper-free aluminum with natural finish • EBMC and EPC optional finish is Corro-free™ epoxy for use in exceptionally corrosive atmospheres • Standard material on NMC Series is Krydon® high impact fiberglass-reinforced polyester, providing excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat Options and Accessories: 1C Considerations for Selection: Considerations for selection of proper enclosure: • The environment of the enclosure location in accordance with NEC/CEC and NEMA/EEMAC requirements • The characteristics of the starter and breaker to be enclosed • See "Quick-Selector" below for guidance Some of the options and accessories available for particular applications are: • Push buttons • Selector switches • Control transformers • Extra overload relays • Extra interlock contacts • Neutral connectors (both insulated and grounded) • Breathers and drains See individual listings for specific options. Many are available in kit form for field addition to existing units. Quick Selector Chart Enclosures for Combination Motor Starters NEMA/ EEMAC Starters NEC/CEC – Hazardous Area Certifications and Compliance Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC Enclosure Type 3, 4*, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Single Speed Non-Reversing 0–5 EPC Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 NMC — 3, 4X, 12 Enclosures EBMC I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III Manufacturers Equipment Enclosed Starter Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Breaker/Switch G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Cover Type Bolted/Ground Joint/Gasketed 0–3 Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Threaded 0–4 Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Gasketed *Without EMP control devices CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 430 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 1C Applications: Interior components are readily accessible with ample end room for wiring Features: • Rugged, corrosion resistant, cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1%) • Component operating handles located through the right side wall of the body permits visual confirmation of correct component assembly and operation • Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code*/Canadian Electrical Code • Semi-clamshell enclosure design, with an external flanged ground joint between body and cover makes interior components more accessible • Minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between the opened cover and an adjacent enclosure • Stainless steel hinges allow the cover to swing well out of the way • Stainless steel, quick release, captive, hex head cover bolts. Stainless steel springs provide clear indication cover bolts are fully retracted from body • Versatile, internal operating mechanisms allow for field adjustment to accommodate popular manufacturers' starters and breakers • Simple, straightforward installation of breaker and starter on predrilled mounting plate within enclosure. Mounting plate also field removable. • Circuit breaker motor circuit protector external operating handle can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions • Neoprene cover gasket permanently attached to the cover seals out moisture • Bodies have top and bottom drilled and tapped entrances for power conduits plus one at the bottom for control conduit. Removable reducers are supplied, as standard, to accommodate smaller size conduits. All conduit entrances are plugged. • Tap-on mounting feet • Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover • Steel bracket for lifting larger enclosures during installation supplied as standard *National Electrical Code is a Registered Trademark of the National Fire Protection Association. 1C Spectrum™ EBM hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: • For general motor control and circuit protection – indoors and outdoors – in damp, wet, dirty, dusty hazardous locations without the need for a protective shelter • In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent • For across-the-line starting, stopping, speed changing and reversing of polyphase AC induction motors • To provide line disconnect means and short circuit protection • To provide motor overload and undervoltage protection • For service entrance, feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting, heating, appliance and motor circuits • On switchracks or other assemblies where it's desired that motor control be centrally located Side operators leave cover free for control options Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2; Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1; Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2; Groups F, G Class III • UL Standards UL1203 – Hazardous (classified) locations • UL Subject 2062 - High AIC rating (Interrupting Capacity) For Groups C & D only Volt RMS Symm-Amperes 240 65,000 480 50,000 600 25,000 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Standard Materials: • • • • • Body and cover – copper-free aluminum Operating handle – copper-free aluminum Operating shafts and bushings – stainless steel Cover bolts, hinges, washer and retractile springs – stainless steel Interior parts – sheet steel, electrogalvanized Electrical Rating Range: • Motor starters – NEMA/EEMAC sizes 0-5 • Circuit breakers – 100, 150, 225, 250, 400, 600, 800, 1000† ampere frame sizes • Motor circuit protectors – 150, 250, 400 ampere frame sizes † 1000 Ampere Frame (max. 800 ampere trip) CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 431 1C EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Options: The following options are available from the factory by adding suffix to catalog number – suffixes are added alphanumerically. Catalog Number System Example EBMC1FB-➀-DT30FAL36-W643-➁ ➀ Options in this position are additions to the enclosure itself and should be listed alphanumerically. 1C ➁ Options in this position are modifications to the starter and/or circuit breaker and should be listed alphanumerically. EBMC Series motor control enclosures with combination line starters. When specifying any one of the following options with Spectrum™ EBM Motor Controls (J1, J3, PB23, RR2, RR3) it is necessary to order DSL Legend Plates for identification and marking of the device(s) being used. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Position Description in Cat. # Suffix • Ambient compensated circuit breaker trip setting ........................................................................ ➁ AC • Less overload relays (lighting contactor).................... ➀ CL • Less overload relays (motor contactor)...................... ➀ CM • Control Circuit Transformer, 100VA for NEMA/EEMAC sizes 0–2, 600/480/240–120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not provided) .............................................................. ➀ FTPS100 • Control Circuit Transformer, 200VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 3, 600/480/240–120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not provided) .............................................................. ➀ FTPS200 • Control Circuit Transformer, 300VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 4, 5 600/480/240–120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not provided) .............................................................. ➀ FTPS300 • Pilot light, 120VAC, red jewel, w/blank indicating plate .......................................................... ➀ J1 • Pilot light, 120VAC, green jewel, w/blank indicating plate .......................................................... ➀ J3 • LED pilot lights (in place of standard incandescent lamps) .................................................. ➀ LED • Less heaters in starter overload relay........................... ➁ 0 • Start-Stop pushbuttons (requires 2 spaces)................ ➀ PB23‡ • On-Off selector switch ................................................ ➀ RR2‡ • Hand-Off-Auto selector switch ................................... ➀ RR3‡ • Space heater, 120 Volt, 25 Watts ................................ ➀ R11 • Space heater, 240 Volt, 25 Watts ................................ ➀ R22 • Space heater, 480 Volt, 25 Watts ................................ ➀ R44 • Automatic reset overload relay .................................... ➀ S1 • Insulated neutral w/2 connectors ................................ ➀ S146 • Std. drain, Class I, B,C & D; Class II, E, F & G; Class III ...................................................................... ➀ S756‡ • Std. breather & drain, Class I, B,C & D; Class II, E, F & G; Class III ..................................................... ➀ S756V‡ • External epoxy finish ................................................... ➀ S752 • Internal and external epoxy finish ................................ ➀ S753 • Additional control contacts, N.O. or N.C. – for single speed, non-reversing starters only (number limited by design of starter. Details on specific makes and sizes on request.) Auxiliary contacts on starter 1 N.O. & 1 N.C................ ➁ S781 Auxiliary contacts on starter 2 N.O. & 2 N.C................ ➁ S782 Auxiliary contacts on starter 3 N.O. & 3 N.C................ ➁ S783 • Auxiliary switch on Circuit Breaker 1A and 1B contacts ..................................................................... ➁ S784 • Auxiliary switch on Circuit Breaker 2A and 2B contacts ..................................................................... ➁ S785 • 12 Point term. block – 30 Amp, 300V............................ ➀ S786 • General purpose control relay, 4 pole N.O., contacts rated 10A@600V, coil 120VAC, 50 / 60 hertz ............................................................... ➀ S787* *Use of this option with NEMA/EEMAC Size 0, or 1 starters necessitates using the larger "D" size enclosure. ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Breather and drain entries must be plugged for NEMA 4 rating. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 432 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures 1C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Options: • If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below. • Insert Legend Plate(s) Catalog Number (i.e. DSL16) immediately after optional device in the EBM Catalog Number. • If EMP devices are to be added in the field, DSL Legend Plates must be ordered separately as they are not furnished with the EMP/EMPS devices. Example: EBMC1FB-J1-DSL14-J3-DSL09-DT30FAL36-W643 Use the charts below to select the appropriate legend plate(s) for your application. Markings shown in bold print are etched; all others are stamped. Single Function Legend Plates Two Function Legend Plates Background color for all legend plates is black with the following exceptions: Cat. # Marking Cat. # Automatic Blank Blank with single field Close Down Emerg. Stop DSL16 DSL01 DSL02 DSL21 DSL23 DSL17 Blank with 2 fields For-Rev Hand-Auto In-Out Off-On Open-Close DSL03 DSL30 DSL29 DSL35 DSL48 DSL32 Fast Forward Hand In Jog Lower DSL46 DSL18 DSL15 DSL24 DSL10 DSL27 Raise-Lower Run-Jog Safe-Run Start-Stop Slow-Fast Up-Down DSL36 DSL28 DSL86 DSL37 DSL65 DSL33 On Off Open Out Power On Raise DSL07 DSL08 DSL20 DSL25 DSL14 DSL26 Three Function Legend Plates Reset Reverse Run Safe Slow Start DSL12 DSL19 DSL09 DSL85 DSL47 DSL05 Stop Test Trip Up DSL06 DSL13 DSL11 DSL22 Marking Cat. # Auto-Off-Hand Blank with 3 fields Fast-Off-Slow For-Off-Rev Hand-Off-Auto Run-Off-Jog DSL49 DSL04 DSL41 DSL40 DSL39 DSL38 Open-Off-Close Raise-Off-Lower Slow-Off-Fast Up-Off-Down 1-Off-2 DSL43 DSL87 DSL88 DSL44 DSL42 Marking Start Stop Emerg. Stop Plate Color Green Red Red 1C Marking ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 433 1C EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Dimensions (In inches)† Dimensions 1C In Inches: *1" Conduit entrance for control conductors (top & bottom). Enclosure Enclosure Only Size Cat. # Symbol A B C D Size 0, 1 FVNR combination line starter§ EBMCFB B 25.75 24.75 26.90 6.00 E F **Conduit entrance for power conductors (top & bottom). (All conduit entrances supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.) G J** Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T✪ w/RE K L M N O P 13.03 14.78 12.13 2" 1.5" 3.25 3.13 10.25 — — 22.00 Size 2 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFD D 28.25 27.25 29.40 6.00 13.03 14.67 12.13 3" 2.5" 3.25 3.13 10.25 — — 24.50 Size 3 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFG■ G 38.13 36.50 39.28 6.00 EBMCFH H 37.50 36.50 38.65 6.00 13.03 14.78 12.13 3" 14.65 16.65 13.54 3" 2.5" 2.5" 3.25 3.13 10.25 — 3.25 3.94 11.66 — — — 34.06 33.75 Size 4 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFK■ K 43.12 41.50 42.65 12.00 17.65 20.46 12.80 (2) 3" EBMCFL L 53.47 51.50 53.28 12.00 17.90 20.58 15.00 (2) 4" (2) 2.5" (2) 3.5" 3.25 3.00 10.78 — — 19.97 4.00 3.50 13.03 41.50 18.40 29.88 Size 5 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFM M 64.22 62.50 64.03 12.00 17.90 21.08 15.00 (2) 4" (2) 3.5" 4.00 3.50 13.03 41.50 18.40 34.46 †Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. ‡ Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. §Use EBMCFD enclosure when LVR1 or S787 options are ordered with Size 0 or 1 combination starters. ■For Cutler-Hammer W200 Advantage® starters. ✪Drilled & Tapped. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 434 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Single-Speed Non-Reversing with Circuit Breakers 3-Pole 60 hertz, 600VAC Maximum Ordering Information: To order an enclosure complete with starter and breaker, insert the manufacturer's symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes see pages 435–436. Motor Starter Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Select the complete Cat. No. below and specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters. 1C Instantaneous magnetic trip circuit breakers (magnetic circuit interrupters) can be supplied. Consult factory. For combination starters with motor circuit protectors for single speed, non-reversing motors see page 437. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings below. Circuit Breaker Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Line Volts NEMA Size Amp Rating Frame Volts Frame Types 2 2 2 120 120 120 0 0 0 30 30 30 240 480 600 FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC0FB ➀30➁32 ➂613 EBMC0FB ➀30➁34 ➂613 EBMC0FB ➀30➁36 ➂613 3 3 3 240 240 240 0 0 0 20 20 20 240 480 600 FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC0FB ➀20➁32 ➂623 EBMC0FB ➀20➁34 ➂623 EBMC0FB ➀20➁36 ➂623 5 5 5 480 480 600 0 0 0 15 15 15 480 600 600 FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC0FB ➀15➁34 ➂643 EBMC0FB ➀15➁36 ➂643 EBMC0FB ➀15➁36 ➂663 5 5 5 240 240 240 1 1 1 30 30 30 240 480 600 FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC1FB ➀30➁32 ➂623 EBMC1FB ➀30➁34 ➂623 EBMC1FB ➀30➁36 ➂623 71/2 71/2 71/2 240 240 240 1 1 1 50 50 50 240 480 600 FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC1FB ➀50➁32 ➂623 EBMC1FB ➀50➁34 ➂623 EBMC1FB ➀50➁36 ➂623 10 10 10 480 480 600 1 1 1 30 30 30 480 600 600 FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC1FB ➀30➁34 ➂643 EBMC1FB ➀30➁36 ➂643 EBMC1FB ➀30➁36 ➂663 10 10 10 240 240 240 2 2 2 50 50 50 240 480 600 FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD ➀50➁32 ➂623 EBMC2FD ➀50➁34 ➂623 EBMC2FD ➀50➁36 ➂623 15 15 15 240 240 240 2 2 2 70 70 70 240 480 600 FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD ➀70➁32 ➂623 EBMC2FD ➀70➁34 ➂623 EBMC2FD ➀70➁36 ➂623 15 15 15 480 480 600 2 2 2 40 40 40 480 600 600 FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD ➀40➁34 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀40➁36 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀40➁36 ➂663 20 20 20 480 480 600 2 2 2 50 50 50 480 600 600 FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD ➀50➁34 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀50➁36 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀50➁36 ➂663 25 25 25 480 480 600 2 2 2 70 70 70 480 600 600 FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD ➀70➁34 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀70➁36 ➂643 EBMC2FD ➀70➁36 ➂663 20 25 30 240 240 240 3 3 3 90 100 125 240 240 480 FAL, TEB FAL, TEB TED EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMC3FH ➀90➁32 ➂623 EBMC3FH ➀100➁32 ➂623 EBMC3FH ➀125➁34 ➂623 480 600 600 FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMC3FH ➀70➁34 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀70➁36 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀70➁36 ➂663 30 480 3 70 30 480 3 70 30 600 3 70 ➀➁➂ See pages 435–436 for configurable options. With Breaker & Starter Cat. # § 1C Max. HP Polyphase Enclosure Without Breaker & Starter Cat. # To include a 120V coil, insert a "1" between second to last and last character in catalog number. 120V coil standard with FTPS option. Ex. EBMC0FB-➀30➁32-➂613 becomes EBMC0FB-➀30➁32-➂6113 CHS Controls AB ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. §Starters are furnished with 3 heaters, when heater ratings are fully specified. www.crouse-hinds.com Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 435 1C Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Single-Speed Non-Reversing with Circuit Cl. III Breakers and Fusible Disconnect Switches NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures 3-Pole 60 hertz, 600VAC Maximum 1C Motor Starter Circuit Breaker Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Max. HP Polyphase Line Volts NEMA Size Amp Rating Frame Volts Frame Types Enclosure Without Breaker & Starter Cat. # 40 40 40 480 480 600 3 3 3 90 90 90 480 600 600 FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMC3FH ➀90➁34 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀90➁36 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀90➁36 ➂663 50 50 50 480 480 600 3 3 3 100 100 100 480 600 600 FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMC3FH ➀100➁34 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀100➁36 ➂643 EBMC3FH ➀100➁36 ➂663 40 50 60 60 75 75 240 240 480 600 480 600 4 4 4 4 4 4 175 200 125 100 150 125 600 600 600 600 600 600 TFK/ TFK/ TFK/ TFK/ TFK/ TFK/ EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL 100 480 4 200 600 TFK/ JD/ KAL, TFJ, JDB EBMCFL JD/ JD/ JD/ JD/ JD/ JD/ KAL, KAL, KAL, KAL, KAL, KAL, TFJ, TFJ, TFJ, TFJ, TFJ, TFJ, JDB JDB JDB JDB JDB JDB With Breaker & Starter Cat. # § ➀175➁36 ➀200➁36 ➀125➁36 ➀100➁36 ➀150➁36 ➀125➁36 ➂623 ➂623 ➂643 ➂663 ➂643 ➂663 EBMC4FL ➀200➁36 ➂643 100 600 4 150 600 TFK/ JD/ KAL, TFJ, JDB EBMCFL EBMC4FL ➀150➁36 ➂663 125 150 480 480 5 5 300 400 600 600 TJK/ KD/ LAL, TJJ, KDB EBMCFM TJK/ KD/ LAL, TJJ, KDB EBMCFM EBMC5FM ➀300➁36 ➂643 EBMC5FM ➀400➁36 ➂643 Motor Starter Fusible Disconnect Switch Max. HP Polyphase Max. Line Volts NEMA Size Amp Rating Max. Volts Switch Type With Disconnect Switch & Starter Cat. # 5 10 25 30 600 600 600 600 0 1 2 3 30 30 60 100 600 600 600 600 DS161R DS161R DS262R DS363R EBMC0FD EBMC1FD EBMC2FD EBMC3FH ➀Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D WFD30J36 W643 WFD30J36 W643 WFD60J36 W643 WFD100J36 W643 NEMA Size Without Switch & Starter Cat. # Symbol WT TT W 0 1 2 3 ➁Select Circuit Breaker Frame Type based on Frame Size, Voltage, and Manufacturer desired: 100 Amp. Frame 225 Amp. Frame and and 150 Amp. Frame 250 Amp. Frame 240V 480V 600V Manufacturer AC AC AC 600VAC EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFH FD FD FD FD 400 Amp. Frame 600VAC Cutler-Hammer — EHD FDB JD – Interchangeable Trip Unit JDB – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit General Electric TEB TED TED TFK – Interchangeable Trip Unit TFJ – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit TJK – Interchangeable Trip Unit TJJ – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Square D FAL FAL FAL KAL LAL ➂Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer KD – Interchangeable Trip Unit KDB – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Symbol AB D G W CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. §Starters are furnished with 3 heaters, when heater ratings are fully specified. 436 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EBMC Combination Line Starters Single-Speed Non-Reversing with Motor Circuit Protectors 3-Pole 60 hertz, 600VAC Maximum Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 1C Ordering Information: Select the complete Catalog No. below and specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motors or specify ampere rating of heaters. Motor Starter Volts NEMA Size MCP Amp Rating Enclosure without Starter & MCP Cat. # Enclosure with Starter & MCP Cat. # § 240 480 600 480 600 0 0 0 0 0 15 7 7 15 15 EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC0FB EBMC0FB EBMC0FB EBMC0FB EBMC0FB ➀15A➁36 ➂623 ➀7A➁36 ➂643 ➀7A➁36 ➂663 ➀15A➁36 ➂643 ➀15A➁36 ➂663 71/2 71/2 10 10 240 480 480 600 1 1 1 1 30 15 30 15 EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB ➀30A➁36 ➀15A➁36 ➀30A➁36 ➀15A➁36 10 15 15 20 25 25 240 240 480 600 480 600 2 2 2 2 2 2 50 100 30 30 50 50 EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD ➀50A➁36 ➂623 ➀100A➁36 ➂623 ➀30A➁36 ➂643 ➀30A➁36 ➂663 ➀50A➁36 ➂643 ➀50A➁36 ➂663 30 30 50 50 240 600 480 600 3 3 3 3 100 50 100 100 EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMC3FH EBMC3FH EBMC3FH EBMC3FH ➀100A➁36 ➂623 ➀50A➁36 ➂663 ➀100A➁36 ➂643 ➀100A➁36 ➂663 50 100 100 240 480 600 4 4 4 250* 250* 250* EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMC4FL ➀250➃➁36 ➂623 EBMC4FL ➀250➃➁36 ➂643 EBMC4FL ➀250➃➁36 ➂663 60 100 125 150 200 200 240 240 480 600 480 600 5 5 5 5 5 5 250* 400 250* 250* 400 400 EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM Max. HP Polyphase 3 3 3 5 5 Symbol WP TP DP ➁Select Motor Circuit Protector Frame Type based on Frame Size and Manufacturer desired: 150 Amp. 250 Amp. 400 Amp. Frame Frame Frame Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D ➂Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer HMCP (F-Frame) TEC FAL HMCP (J-Frame) TFC KAL HMCP (K-Frame) TJC LAL Symbol AB D G W ‡ Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. *General Electric motor circuit protectors are 225 Amp. Rated. §Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified. CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com ➀250➃➁36 ➀400➃➁36 ➀250➃➁36 ➀250➃➁36 ➀400➃➁36 ➀400➃➁36 1C ➀Motor Circuit Protectors: Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D ➂623 ➂643 ➂643 ➂663 ➂623 ➂623 ➂643 ➂663 ➂643 ➂663 ➃After the MCP amp rating the following character symbol must be entered to designate the trip range. Consult factory for other trip ranges available. MCP Amp Rating Symbol Trip Range Cutler-Hammer (WP) 21 to 70 7 A 45 to 150 15 A 90 to 300 30 A 150 to 500 50 B 300 to 1000 100 B 1250 to 2500 250 J 1250 to 2500 400 G General Electric (TP) 7 15 30 50 100 225 400 A A A A A B C 18 to 90 42 to 198 90 to 390 180 to 660 300 to 1308 1000 to 2250 1000 to 3300 Square D (DP) 7 15 30 50 100 250 400 A A A A A H E 18 to 70 50 to 180 100 to 350 150 to 580 300 to 1100 1250 to 2500 1250 to 2500 US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 437 1C Spectrum™ EBM Enclosures Supplied with Cutler-Hammer Advantage™* Starters Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Type 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 1C Applications: Spectrum EBM-E series of hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: • For general motor control and circuit protection – indoors and outdoors – in damp, wet, dirty, dusty hazardous locations without the need for protective shelter. • In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent. • For across-the-line starting and stopping of polyphase AC induction motors. • To provide line disconnect means and short circuit protection (EBMC). • To provide motor overload and undervoltage protection. • For feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting, heating, appliance, and motor circuits (EBMC). • On switchracks or other assemblies where it's desired that motor control be centrally located. Features: • Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code®. • Solid state electronic Cutler-Hammer Advantage™ starter. • Smaller enclosures required than for conventional starter applications. • Elimination of heater elements, contact chatter, and welding due to low voltage supply. • Precise overcurrent protection and constant coil power. • Same performance and labor-saving benefits from the versatile Spectrum EBM Enclosure product line. • Universal mounting plates and hardware for all major manufacturers' components. • Mercury switch electronic overload reset. • Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover. Spectrum EBM-E Series Combination Line Starter with Advantage Starter. Options: • See page 439 for options for the EBM enclosures supplied with Cutler-Hammer Advantage starters. The following suffixes cannot be ordered with this style equipment: C, LVR1, O, S. Dimensions In Inches: Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • UL Standards UL1203 – Hazardous (classified) locations • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 • UL Subject 2062 - High AIC rating (Interrupting Capacity) Volt RMS Symm-Amperes 240 65,000 480 50,000 600 25,000 • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Standard Materials: • • • • • Body and cover – copper-free aluminum Operating handle – copper-free aluminum Operating shafts and bushings – stainless steel Interior parts – sheet steel, electrogalvanized Cover bolts, washers, and retractile springs – stainless steel EBMCFM-E Electrical Rating Ranges: CHS Controls AB • Motor starters – NEMA sizes 1–5 Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 438 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 EBMCFK-E See page 439 for dimensions of different enclosure sizes. *Advantage is a trademark of Cutler-Hammer Products. ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Type 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Spectrum™ EBM Enclosures Supplied with Cutler-Hammer Advantage™ Starters Enclosure Only Cat. # Dimensions (In Inches): A B C D EBMCFB E EBMCFG E EBMCFK E EBMCFM E 25.75 38.13 43.12 64.22 24.75 36.50 41.50 62.50 26.90 39.28 42.65 64.03 6.00 6.00 12.00 12.00 1C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight F **J Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T w/RE K L 14.78 14.78 20.46 21.08 2" 3" (2) 3" (2) 4" 3.25 3.25 3.25 4.00 3.13 3.13 3.25 4.00 1.5" 2.5" (2) 2.5" (2) 3.5" "H" – Use 1/ 2" diameter bolts for all enclosures listed above. *1" D&T conduit entry for control conductors supplied with PLG plug (top and bottom). **Conduit entrance for power conductors (top & bottom). (All conduit entrances supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.) Ordering Information – Combination Line Starters • To order an enclosure complete with motor starter and circuit breaker (or motor circuit protector), insert the manufacturer's symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes. EBM "E" Series Combination Line Starters and Enclosures for Cutler-Hammer Advantage Starters, Single Speed Non-Reversing Motor Starter Circuit Breaker With Breaker (or Motor Circuit Protector) & Cutler-Hammer Advantage Starter Cat. # Max. HP Polyphase Line Volt NEMA Size Amp Trip Frame Volts Frame Type 71/2 71/2 71/2 10 10 10 240 240 240 480 480 600 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 50 50 30 30 30 240 480 600 480 600 600 FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, TEB TED, TED, TED, TED, TED, EHD FDB FDB FDB FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB E E E E E E EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB ➀50➁32 ➀50➁34 ➀50➁36 ➀30➁34 ➀30➁36 ➀30➁36 W6213 W6213 W6213 W6413 W6413 W6613 E E E E E E 15 15 15 25 25 25 240 240 240 480 480 600 2 2 2 2 2 2 70 70 70 70 70 50 240 480 600 480 600 600 FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, TEB TED, TED, TED, TED, TED, FDB FDB EHD FDB FDB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB E E E E E E EBMC2FB EBMC2FB EBMC2FB EBMC2FB EBMC2FB EBMC2FB ➀70➁32 ➀70➁34 ➀70➁36 ➀70➁34 ➀70➁36 ➀50➁36 W6213 W6213 W6213 W6413 W6413 W6413 E E E E E E 30 30 30 50 50 50 240 240 240 480 480 600 3 3 3 3 3 3 125 125 125 100 100 90 240 480 600 480 600 600 FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, TEB TED, TED, TED, TED, TED, EHD FDB EHD FDB FDB EBMCFG EBMCFG EBMCFG EBMCFG EBMCFG EBMCFG E E E E E E EBMC3FG EBMC3FG EBMC3FG EBMC3FG EBMC3FG EBMC3FG ➀125➁32 W6213 E ➀125➁34 W6213 E ➀125➁36 W6213 E ➀100➁34 W6413 E ➀100➁36 W6413 E ➀90➁36 W6613 E 50 100 100 240 480 600 4 4 4 200 200 150 600 600 600 TFK, JD, KAL, TFJ, JDB TFK, JD, KAL, TFJ, JDB TFK, JD, KAL, TFJ, JDB EBMCFK E EBMCFK E EBMCFK E EBMC4FK ➀200➁W36 W6213 E EBMC4FK ➀200➁36 W6413 E EBMC4FK ➀150➁36 W6613 E 75 150 200 240 480 600 5 5 5 400 400 400 600 600 600 TJK, KD, LAL, TJJ, KDB TJK, KD, LAL, TJJ, KDB TJK, KD, LAL, TJJ, KDB EBMCFM E EBMCFM E EBMCFM E EBMC5FM ➀400➁36 W6213 E EBMC5FM ➀400➁36 W6413 E EBMC5FM ➀400➁36 W6613 E ➀With Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D 1C Enclosure Without Breaker & Starter Cat. #† ➀With Motor Circuit Protectors: Symbol Note: WT TT DT Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D Only units with a frame volts of 600 are available with Motor Circuit Protectors: Symbol WP TP DP ➁Select Circuit Breaker Frame Type based on Frame Size, Voltage, and Manufacturer desired. 100 Amp Frame and 150 Amp Frame 225 Amp Frame and 250 Amp Frame Manufacturer 240VAC 480VAC 600VAC 600VAC 400 Amp Frame 600VAC EHD FDB JD – Interchangeable Trip Unit JDB – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit KD – Interchangeable Trip Unit KDB – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit General Electric TEB TED TED TFK – Interchangeable Trip Unit TFJ – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit TJK – Interchangeable Trip Unit TJJ – Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Square D FAL FAL KAL LAL Cutler-Hammer — FAL ➁Select Motor Circuit Protector Frame Type based on Frame Size and Manufacturer desired. Before the frame type a character symbol must be entered to designate the trip range. See page 437 for appropriate symbol. Manufacturer 150 Amp Frame (600 V) 250 Amp Frame (600 V) 400 Amp Frame (600 V) Cutler-Hammer HMCP (F-Frame) HMCP (J-Frame) HMCP (K-Frame) General Electric TEC TFC TJC Square D FAL KAL LAL www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se †Note: "Enclosures only" are supplied with necessary operators, linkages, and mercury switch electronic overload resets. ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 439 1C EPC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Applications: 1C • For across-the-line starting of polyphase AC induction motors • In locations which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts • In damp, wet or corrosive locations • For installation indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To provide disconnecting means, motor branch circuit protection, motor running protection, undervoltage protection and remote starting and stopping due to the combination of thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and magnetic motor starter • NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 • UL Standard: 698 • CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 30 Standard Materials: • • • • Body and cover – copper-free aluminum Operating handle – copper-free aluminum Operating shafts – stainless steel Interior parts – sheet steel Standard Finishes: Features: • Quick-opening covers – less than two turns to remove or install • Three section design for ease of installation • Water-shedding construction with female threads on top cover, male threads on bottom cover, and top cover skirted • Specially located stops and locks insure adequate thread engagement and prevent overtightening • Separate replaceable mounting bracket attached to the rear of the body provides three-point suspension for quick installation and leveling – one keyhole slot at top and two open slots at bottom • Bodies have two taper-tapped conduit hubs with integral bushings on the top, and two more directly below • Universal mounting plate and reset mechanism will accommodate any of the motor starters and circuit breakers in catalog listing • When interior mounting plate is removed, feeder and branch circuit conductors are easily pulled into the wiring chamber. The interior assembly, with breaker and starter attached, is then replaced, final connections made, and covers assembled • External handle, which operates breaker can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions • Breaker is trip-free of the handle, therefore it will open under short circuit or overload, even if the external handle is locked in the "ON" position • Furnished with third overload relay as standard Assembled unit • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural • Sheet steel – electrogalvanized with chromate finish Description Electrical Rating Range: • Starters – Sizes 0, 1 and 3 inclusive • Breakers – 100 and 150 ampere frame sizes • Motor Circuit Protectors – 100 ampere frame size Options: The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. No. and many are available in kit form or for field addition to existing units: See page 459 for listing of kits Description Suffix Control circuit transformer 600/480/240–120 volts, 50 or 60 hertz (Sizes 0 and 1 – 100–50 VA, Size 3 – 200–350 VA) Fusible – Secondary............................ FT Fusible – Primary and secondary........ FTPS Auxiliary Contacts on Starter or Contactor* 1 N.O./1 N.C................................... S781 2 N.O./2 N.C................................... S782 3 N.O./3 N.C................................... S783 Auxiliary Switch on Circuit Breaker or Motor Circuit Protector* 1A/1B (1P2T)................................... S784 2A/2B (2P2T)................................... S785 Side bosses drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs (except 15" dia. – 1" size)..................... S366 Back boss drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs (except 15" dia. – 1" size)..................... S367 Pushbuttons (heavy duty): START-STOP.................................. PB3 CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Certifications and Compliances: EPC combination line starters and enclosures are used: 440 Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Separated view showing major components Suffix Selector switches (standard duty): ON-OFF........................................... RR2 HAND-OFF-AUTO........................... RR3 Pilot lights: Red, 120 volt................................... J1 Green, 120 volt................................ J3 LED pilot lights, in place of standard incandescent lamps.............................. LED Pilot light transformers: 240 volt†.......................................... T2 480 volt†.......................................... T4 600 volt†.......................................... T5 Space heaters: 120 volt............................................ R11 240 volt............................................ R22 480 volt............................................ R44 Automatic reset overload relay............. S1 Less overload relays (lighting contactor).............................................. CL Less overload relays (motor contactor) CM Separate AC control circuit.................. Specify Insulated neutral with 2 connectors (50, 100 & 225 amp)............................. S146 Grounded neutral stud with 3 connectors (50, 100 & 225 amp).......... S178 Pilot light holes drilled, tapped and plugged for future addition of pilot lights One hole.......................................... S541 Two holes........................................ S542 Standard Breather (Class I, Groups C, D, Class II, Groups E, F, G, Class III).... S219 Standard Drain (Class I, Groups C, D, Class II, Groups E, F, G, Class III)........ S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Class I, Groups C, D, Class II, Groups E, F, G, Class III)...................... S198V Universal Breather – Drain (Class I, Groups C, D, Class II, Groups F, G)..... S454‡ (2) Universal Breather – Drains (Class I, Groups C, D, Class II, Groups F, G).. S454V‡ Less heaters......................................... 0 *Application is limited by starter, contactor, circuit breaker or motor circuit protector design – Consult Factory † Required for pilot lights on other than 120 volt control circuits. One required for each lamp. ‡ Not suitable for NEMA 4. Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EPC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Dimensions* (In Inches) Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 1C 1C Single-Speed Non-Reversing Sizes 0, 1 and 3 starters EPC87 EPC813 EPC87–FTPS or EPC87–FT EPC813–FTPS or EPC813–FT Int. Dia. 7" 11" 7" 11" a b c d e f g h j k l m n p Dimensions 105/8 261/16 3511/16 1411/16 63/4 711/16 115/8 2 75/8 73/8 21/16 93/8 51/4 11/4 161/8 381/2 61 201/4 91/8 85/8 203/4 41/2 18 12 25/8 11 51/2 21/2 Dimensions† 105/8 311/16 4711/16 1411/16 113/4 711/16 115/8 9 75/8 73/8 21/16 93/8 51/4 11/4 161/8 411/2 671/2 201/4 121/8 85/8 203/4 8 18 12 25/8 11 51/2 21/2 *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. †For units with Control Circuit Transformer (suffix FT or FTPS). www.crouse-hinds.com CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 441 1C EPC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Single Speed, Non-Reversing with Circuit Breakers 3-Pole 60 hertz, 600 VAC Maximum Ordering Information: Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings below. To order an enclosure complete with starter and breaker, insert the manufacturer's symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes below. Instantaneous magnetic trip circuit breakers (magnetic circuit interrupters) can be supplied. Consult factory. Select the complete Cat. No. below and specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters. Motor Starter 1C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Circuit Breaker For combination starters with motor circuit protectors or single speed, non-reversing motors see page 443. Enclosure Max. HP Polyphase Volts NEMA Size Amp Rating Frame Hub Size in. Int. Dia. in. Without Starter & Circuit Breaker Cat. # 2 120 0 30 EB 11/4 7 EPC87 EPC870 ➀30ED ➁613 3 3 3 3 240 480 480 600 0 0 0 0 20 15 15 15 EHD EHD FDB FD 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 7 7 7 7 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 ➀20EHD ➁623 ➀15EHD ➁643 ➀15FD ➁643 ➀15FD ➁653 5 5 5 5 240 480 480 600 1 0 0 0 30 15 15 15 EHD EHD FDB FDB 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 7 7 7 7 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC871 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 ➀30EHD ➁623 ➀15EHD ➁643 ➀15FD ➁643 ➀15FD ➁653 71/2 71/2 71/2 71/2 240 480 480 600 1 1 1 1 50 30 30 30 EHD EHD FDB FDB 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 7 7 7 7 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC871 EPC871 EPC871 EPC871 ➀50EHD ➁623 ➀30EHD ➁643 ➀30FD ➁643 ➀30FD ➁653 10 10 10 480 480 600 1 1 1 30 30 30 EHD FDB FDB 11/4 11/4 11/4 7 7 7 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC871 ➀30EHD ➁643 EPC871 ➀30FD ➁643 EPC871 ➀30FD ➁653 40 40 40 480 480 600 3 3 3 90 90 90 EHD FDB FDB 21/2 21/2 21/2 11 11 11 EPC813 EPC813 EPC813 EPC813 ➀90EHB ➁643 EPC813 ➀90FB ➁643 EPC813 ➀90FB ➁653 50 50 50 480 480 600 3 3 3 100 100 100 EHD FDB FDB 21/2 21/2 21/2 11 11 11 EPC813 EPC813 EPC813 EPC813 ➀100EHB ➁643 EPC813 ➀100FB ➁643 EPC813 ➀100FB ➁653 ➀Circuit Breakers: With Starter & Circuit Breaker Cat. # § ➁Motor Starters: Manufacturer Symbol Frames 100/150AMP 240V 480V 600V General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer TT DT WT TEB FAL* EHD TED* FAL* EHD TED* FAL* FB, FDB *Specify Voltage § Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified. Manufacturer Symbol Allen-Bradley AB General Electric G Square D■ D Cutler-Hammer W ■ When Square D starter is used in EPC813, EPC-KIT 32 must be ordered CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 442 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EPC Combination Line Starters Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Single-Speed Non-Reversing with Motor Circuit Protectors 3-Pole 60 hertz, 600 VAC Maximum Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 1C Ordering Information: Select the complete Catalog No. below and specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motors or specify ampere rating of heaters. Current limiters may be ordered by specification*. Enclosure with Motor Circuit Protector and Starter § Amp Rating Cat. # 3 3 3 5 5 240 480 600 480 600 0 0 0 0 0 15 7 7 15 15 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 ➀15HMCP ➁623 ➀7HMCP ➁643 ➀7HMCP ➁653 ➀15HMCP ➁643 ➀15HMCP ➁653 71/2 71/2 10 10 240 480 600 480 1 1 1 1 30 15 15 30 EPC871 EPC871 EPC871 EPC871 ➀30HMCP ➀15HMCP ➀15HMCP ➀30HMCP ➀Motor Circuit Protectors Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer TP DP WP ➁Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer AB G D W 1C Motor Starter Max. HP NEMA Polyphase Volts Size ➁623 ➁643 ➁653 ➁643 Symbol Symbol *General Electric or Cutler-Hammer MCPs only. § Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 443 1C NMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 600VAC Heavy Duty Applications: • NMC combination magnetic line starters are for use in across-the-line motor starting, motor disconnect, motor and line protection and start-stop operations. 1C Features: • Enclosures are made of Krydon® high impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat. • Unitized, strong and durable enclosure construction provides longer service life for equipment. • Provided with top and bottom mounting feet. • Enclosure has hinged access door which opens 160° for easy wiring and maintenance. Three screws for door frame are hidden behind access door. • Access door may be padlocked to prevent unauthorized access. Combination line starter with optional START-STOP pushbuttons – open view Options: Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4X and 12 Electrical Rating Ranges: • 3-pole, 60 hertz, 600 VAC max. • Starters – sizes 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 • Breakers – 100, 150, 225 and 250 amp frame • Switches – 30, 60, 100 amp • Motor circuit protectors – 15, 30, 50, 100, 150 amp Description Suffix Control circuit transformer 480/240-120 volts, 50 or 60 hertz, (Sizes 0 and 1 – 50VA, Size 2 – 100VA, Size 3 – 150VA, Size 4 – 300VA) Fusible Secondary.................................... FT Primary and secondary................ FTPS Auxiliary Contact on Starter or Contactor* 1NO/1NC..................................... S781 2 NO/2 NC................................... S782 3 NO/3 NC................................... S783 Auxiliary Switch on Circuit Breaker or Motor Circuit Protector* 1A/1B .......................................... S784 2A/2B .......................................... S785 Time delay low voltage release for 3-wire control with 2, 4 or 6second adjustment. For singlespeed, non-reversing starters only. Control circuit voltage: 120 volt, 60 hertz.............................. LVR1† 240 volt, 60 hertz.............................. LVR2† 480 volt, 60 hertz.............................. LVR4† Combination line starter with optional START-STOP pushbuttons – closed view Description Suffix Pilot lights, 120 V primary – specify other primary voltages as required: Red pilot light.................................. J1 Green pilot light............................... J3 LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps LED Pushbutton (heavy duty, uses two device holes): START-STOP................................... PB13 Selector Switch (heavy duty) ON–OFF........................................... RR17 HAND–OFF–AUTO.......................... RR18 JOG–RUN–OFF............................... RR19 Padlock attachment for: Pushbutton...................................... S708 Automatic reset overload relay....... S1 Less overload relays (contactor)..... C Separate AC control circuit............. Specify Insulated, groundable type terminal block for grounded or ungrounded neutral can be supplied................... S618 Hubs (see "NOTE ON HUBS") – see page 646 Grounding plate or bushing – see page 646 *Application limited by Size 5 starter, contactor or circuit breaker design – consult factory. †Option not available on NMC1024B. NOTE ON HUBS: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when combination starters are ordered complete. If enclosures only are ordered, hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options"). CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 444 www.crouse-hinds.com Starter Size Number Included Hub Size 0 3 3 3 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds /4 /4 1 /4 11/2 /4 2 /4 21/2 NMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures 1C Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 Single-Speed, Non-Reversing 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information - With Circuit Breakers To order an enclosure complete with starter and breaker, insert the manufacturer’s symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes. Select the complete Cat. No. below and specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters. Starters are furnished with three heaters. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings below. Specific reference table is shown in the listings below. Instantaneous magnetic trip circuit breakers (magnetic circuit interrupters) can be supplied. Motor Starter Circuit Breaker Enclosure Trip With Starter & Without Starter & Max. HP Volts NEMA Setting Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Polyphase (A-C) Size Amps Frame Cat. # Cat. # 2 2 120 240 0 0 30 15 EB EB NMC1024B ➀30EB ➁6130 NMC1024B ➀15EB ➁6230 NMC1024B NMC1024B 240 0 20 EB NMC1024B ➀20EB ➁6230 NMC1024B 240 480 600 1 0 0 30 15 15 EB EHD FDB NMC1024B ➀30EB ➁6231 NMC1024B ➀15EHB ➁6430 NMC1024B ➀15FB ➁6530 NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B 71/2 71/2 71/2 240 480 600 1 1 1 50 20 20 EB EHD FDB NMC1024B ➀50EB ➁6231 NMC1024B ➀20EHB ➁6431 NMC1024B ➀20FB ➁6531 NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B 10 10 10 240 480 600 2 1 1 60 30 30 EB EHD FDB NMC1024B2 ➀60EB ➁6232 NMC1024B ➀30EHB ➁6431 NMC1024B ➀30FB ➁6531 NMC1024B2 NMC1024B NMC1024B 15 15 15 240 480 600 2 2 1 80 40 40 EB EHD FDB NMC1024B2 ➀80EB ➁6232 NMC1024B2 ➀40EHB ➁6432 NMC1024B ➀40FB ➁6531 NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 NMC1024B 20 20 20 240 480 600 3 2 2 80 60 50 EB EHD FDB NMC1426B ➀80EB ➁6233 NMC1024B2 ➀60EHB ➁6432 NMC1024B2 ➀50FB ➁6532 NMC1426B NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 25 25 25 240 480 600 3 2 2 80 70 60 EB EHD FDB NMC1426B ➀80EB ➁6233 NMC1024B2 ➀70EHB ➁6432 NMC1024B2 ➀60FB ➁6532 NMC1426B NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 30 30 30 240 480 600 4 3 3 125 80 60 JDB‡ EHD FDB NMC2426B ➀125JB ➁6234 NMC1426B ➀80EHB ➁6433 NMC1426B ➀60FB ➁6533 NMC2426B NMC1426B NMC1426B 40 40 40 240 480 600 4 3 3 150 80 80 JDB‡ EHD FDB NMC2426B ➀150JB ➁6234 NMC1426B ➀80EHB ➁6433 NMC1426B ➀80FB ➁6533 NMC2426B NMC1426B NMC1426B 50 50 50 240 480 600 4 3 3 200 100 100 JDB‡ EHD FDB NMC2426B ➀200JB ➁6234 NMC1426B ➀100EHB ➁6433 NMC1426B ➀100FB ➁6533 NMC2426B NMC1426B NMC1426B 60 60 480 600 4 4 125 100 JDB‡ JDB‡ NMC2426B ➀125JB ➁6434 NMC2426B ➀100JB ➁6534 NMC2426B NMC2426B 75 75 480 600 4 4 150 125 JDB‡ JDB‡ NMC2426B ➀150JB ➁6434 NMC2426B ➀125JB ➁6534 NMC2426B NMC2426B 100 100 480 600 4 4 175 150 JDB‡ JDB‡ NMC2426B ➀175JB ➁6434 NMC2426B ➀150JB ➁6534 NMC2426B NMC2426B ➁Motor Starters: ➀Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer 1C 3 5 5 5 Frames 100/150A Symbol 240V 480V TT DT WT TEB FAL§ EB 600V 225/250A 600V TED§ TED§ TFJ FAL§ FAL§ KAL EHB, EHD FB, FDB JB, JDB Manufacturer Allen-Bradley General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer Symbol AB G D W Information on other starter manufacturers on request. CHS Controls AB NOTE ON HUBS: See page 444. Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se §Specify voltage. ‡Formerly "JB" www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 445 1C NMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Single-Speed, Non-Reversing 600VAC Heavy Duty Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 1C Ordering Information - With Motor Circuit Protector Motor Starter Max. HP Polyphase Volts (AC) NEMA Size MCP Trip Setting Amps Enclosure With Starter & MCP Cat. #§ Without Starter & MCP Cat. # 3 5 5 240 480 600 0 0 0 15 15 15 NMC1024B ➀15MCP ➁6230 NMC1024B ➀15MCP ➁6430 NMC1024B ➀15MCP ➁6530 NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B 71/2 10 10 240 480 600 1 1 1 30 30 30 NMC1024B ➀30MCP ➁6231 NMC1024B ➀30MCP ➁6431 NMC1024B ➀30MCP ➁6531 NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B 15 25 25 240 480 600 2 2 2 50 50 50 NMC1024B2 ➀50MCP ➁6232 NMC1024B2 ➀50MCP ➁6432 NMC1024B2 ➀50MCP ➁6532 NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 30 50 50 240 480 600 3 3 3 100 100 100 NMC1426B ➀100MCP ➁6233 NMC1426B ➀100MCP ➁6433 NMC1426B ➀100MCP ➁6533 NMC1426B NMC1426B NMC1426B 50 100 100 240 480 600 4 4 4 150 150 150 NMC2426P ➀150MCP ➁6234 NMC2426P ➀150MCP ➁6434 NMC2426P ➀150MCP ➁6534 NMC2426P NMC2426P NMC2426P ➀Motor Circuit Protectors: Manufacturer General Electric Cutler-Hammer ➁Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer Symbol G W NOTE ON HUBS: See page 444. Symbol AB D G W Information on other starter manufacturers on request. § With motor circuit protector only. For motor circuit protector with current limiter – information on request. Ordering Information - With Non-fusible Disconnect Switch To order an enclosure complete with disconnect switch, insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings below. Motor Starter Max. HP Polyphase Volts (AC) NEMA Size Non-fusible Disconnect Switch Switch Size-Amps 3 5 5 240 480 600 0 0 0 30 30 30 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6230 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6430 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6530 NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ 71/2 10 10 240 480 600 1 1 1 30 30 30 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6231 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6431 NMC1024D ➀30 ➁6531 NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ 15 25 25 240 480 600 2 2 2 60 60 60 NMC1426D ➀60 ➁6232 NMC1426D ➀60 ➁6432 NMC1426D ➀60 ➁6532 NMC1426D ➀ NMC1426D ➀ NMC1426D ➀ 30 50 50 240 480 600 3 3 3 100 100 100 NMC2426D ➀100 ➁6233 NMC2426D ➀100 ➁6433 NMC2426D ➀100 ➁6533 NMC2426D ➀ NMC2426D ➀ NMC2426D ➀ ➀Disconnect Switches: Manufacturer Symbol General Electric G Square D D Cutler-Hammer W Enclosure With Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat. # Without Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat. # ➁Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer Switch Type Type QMW Class 9422 Type DS NOTE ON HUBS: See page 444. Information on other starter manufacturers on request. CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 446 www.crouse-hinds.com Symbol AB D G W US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds NMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 Single-Speed, Non-Reversing 600VAC Heavy Duty 1C Ordering Information - With Fusible Disconnect Switch NEMA Size Fusible Disconnect Switch Switch SizeFuse Clip Amps Rating-Amps Enclosure With Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat. #■ Without Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat. # 3 5 5 240 480 600 0 0 0 30 30 30 30 30 30 NMC1024D ➀3030 ➁6230 NMC1024D ➀3030 ➁6430 NMC1024D ➀3030 ➁6530 NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ NMC1024D ➀ 71/2 71/2 10 10 10 10 240 240 480 480 600 600 1 1 1 1 1 1 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 30 60 30 60 NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D ➀3030 ➀3060 ➀3030 ➀3060 ➀3030 ➀3060 ➁6231 ➁6231 ➁6431 ➁6431 ➁6531 ➁6531 NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ 15 15 25 25 25 25 240 240 480 480 600 600 2 2 2 2 2 2 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 100 60 100 60 100 NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D ➀6060 ➀6010 ➀6060 ➀6010 ➀6060 ➀6010 ➁6232 ➁6232 ➁6432 ➁6432 ➁6532 ➁6532 NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ 30 50 50 50 240 480 480 600 3 3 3 3 100 100 100 100 100 100 200 100 NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D ➀1010 ➀1010 ➀1020 ➀1010 ➁6233 ➁6433 ➁6433 ➁6533 NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀Disconnect Switches: Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer Switch Type Symbol Type QMW Class 9422 Type DS G D W NOTE ON HUBS: See page 444. ■Fuse clips are arranged for Class H fuses and field modifiable for Class J fuses. For Class ➁Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer 1C Motor Starter Max. HP Volts Polyphase AC Symbol AB D G W Information on other starter manufacturers on request. R fuses, consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 447 1C NMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Dimensions 1C In Inches: NMC Cat. # Outside Dimensions l w d Mounting Dimensions mw ml Door Opening Dimensions dl dw NMC1024 NMC1426 2513/32 2713/32 1113/32 1513/32 823/32 923/32 77/8 117/8 253/8 271/4 227/8 2311/16 511/16 911/16 NMC2426 2713/32 2513/32 923/32 213/4 271/4 2311/16 1911/16 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 448 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 2C Motor Starters Hazardous and Non-hazardous Description Page No. Application/Selection see page 450 Magnetic Line Starters & Enclosures Single speed, non-reversing EBMS Series EPC Series EBMC Series with Advantage* Starter NMG Series see see see see pages pages pages pages 451–452 457–458 455–456 472–473 Manual Line Starters & Enclosures EMN Series NMN Series Manual Motor Starting Switches & Enclosures EFD Series MC Series EDS Series GHG 635 Series NSSC / NFSC see page 461 see page 467 see page 462 see pages 465–466 see page 469 Special Feature Kits For EPC Series see page 459 *Advantage is a trademark of Cutler-Hammer Inc. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 449 2C see page 460 see page 471 Motor Starters 2C Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart Applications: Selection: Options: Line starters are housed in enclosures suitable for specific environments, and are used for: • Across-the-line starting of motors • Motor running protection • Undervoltage protection • Remote or manual starting and stopping Considerations for selection of proper enclosure: • The environment of the enclosure location in accordance with NEC/CEC and NEMA/EEMAC requirements • The characteristics of the starter to be enclosed • See "Quick-Selector" below for guidance Many options are available on: • Material and finishes where special atmospheric conditions prevail • Special features for specific applications. See individual listings for available options, many of which are available in kit form for field addition to existing units. Quick Selector Chart 2C Enclosures for Starters Enclosures MC NEC/CEC – Hazardous Area Compliance None NEMA/ EEMAC Enclosure Type 3, 4, 12 Starter Type Manual NEMA/EEMAC Size Starters Single Speed Non-reversing Motor Phase and Type Single-AC Manufacturers Equipment Enclosed – Starter Cutler-Hammer Cover Type Gasketed EPC Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Magnetic 0-2 Poly-AC Allen-Bradley Cutler-Hammer G.E. Square D Threaded EBMS Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III 3, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Magnetic 0-5 Poly-AC Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Bolted/ Ground Joint/ Gasketed EMN Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Manual 0-1P Single and Poly-AC Allen-Bradley Cutler-Hammer G.E. Square D Bolted/ Ground Joint EDS, EDSC‡ Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Manual DC and Single AC Allen-Bradley G.E. Cutler-Hammer Bolted/ Ground Joint EFD Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III 3, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Manual DC and Single and Poly-AC G.E. Square D Bolted/ Ground Joint NSSC / NFSC None 3, 4X, 12 Manual DC and Single and Poly-AC Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Screw and gasket NMN None 3, 4X, 12 Manual 0-1P Single AC Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Screw and gasket NMG None 3, 4X, 12 Manual 0-4 Poly-AC Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Westinghouse Hinged, screw and gasket *Check listings for Group B suitability. ‡For factory sealed units see pages 522–523. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 450 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EBMS Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 2C Applications: Spectrum™ EBM hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: • For general motor control – indoors or outdoors – in damp, wet, dirty, dusty hazardous locations, without the need for a protective shelter. • In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent. • For across-the-line starting, stopping, speed changing and reversing of polyphase AC induction motors. • To provide motor overload and undervoltage protection. • On switchracks or other assemblies where it's desired that motor control be centrally located. Features: 2C • Rugged, corrosion resistant, cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1%). • Motor starter operating handle located through the right side wall of the body permits visual confirmation of correct component assembly and operation. • Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code® and Canadian Electrical Code. • Semi-clamshell enclosure design, with an external flanged ground joint between body and cover makes interior components more accessible. • Minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between the opened cover and an adjacent enclosure. • Copper-free aluminum hinges allow the cover to swing well out of the way. • Stainless steel, quick release, captive, hex head cover bolts. Stainless steel springs provide clear indication cover bolts are fully retracted from body. • Versatile, internal operating mechanisms allow for field adjustment to accommodate popular manufacturers' starters. • Simple, straightforward installation of starter on pre-drilled mounting plate within enclosure. Mounting plate also field removable. • Neoprene cover gasket permanently attached to the cover seals out moisture. • Bodies have top and bottom drilled and tapped entrances for power conduits plus one at the bottom for control conduit. Removable reducers are supplied as standard, to accommodate smaller size conduits. All conduit entrances are plugged. • Tap-on mounting feet. • Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover. • Steel bracket for lifting larger enclosures during installation supplied as standard. Spectrum EBM motor control enclosures accommodate popular makes of starters. Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • UL Standards: UL1203 • NEMA: 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Standard Materials: • • • • • Body and cover – copper-free aluminum Operating handle – copper-free aluminum Operating shaft and bushing – stainless steel Interior parts – sheet steel, electrogalvanized Cover bolts, washers and retractile springs – stainless steel Electrical Rating Range: • Motor starters – NEMA/EEMAC sizes 0–5 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. National Electrical Code is a Registered Trademark of the National Fire Protection Association. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 451 2C EBMS Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Options: The following options are available from the factory by adding suffix to catalog number. Suffixes are added alphanumerically. Catalog Number System Example EBMS1FB-➀-W6413-➁ ➀ Options in this position are additions to the enclosures and should be listed alphanumerically. 2C ➁ Options in this position are modifications to the motor starter and should be listed alphanumerically. Description Position in Cat. # • Less Overload Relays (lighting contactor) ......................................................................................................................... ➀ • Less Overload Relays (motor contactor) ............................................................................................................................. ➀ • Control Circuit Transformer, 100VA for NEMA/EEMAC sizes 0–2, 600/480/240–120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not included) .................................................... ➀ • Control Circuit Transformer, 200VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 3, 600/480/240–120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not included) .................................................... ➀ • Control Circuit Transformer, 300VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 4, 5 600/480/240–120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not included) .................................................... ➀ • Pilot Light, 120VAC, Red Jewel, w/blank indicating plate .................................................................................................... ➀ • Pilot Light, 120VAC, Green Jewel, w/blank indicating plate ................................................................................................. ➀ • Less Heaters in Starter Overload Relay ............................................................................................................................... ➁ • Start-Stop Pushbuttons (requires 2 spaces) ....................................................................................................................... ➀ • On-Off Selector Switch ....................................................................................................................................................... ➀ • Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch .......................................................................................................................................... ➀ • Space Heater, 120 Volt, 25 Watts ........................................................................................................................................ ➀ • Space Heater, 240 Volt, 25 Watts ........................................................................................................................................ ➀ • Space Heater, 480 Volt, 25 Watts ........................................................................................................................................ ➀ • Automatic Reset Overload Relay ........................................................................................................................................ ➀ • Std. Drain, Class I, B, C&D; Class II, EF&G; Class III ............................................................................................................. ➀ • Std. Breather & Drain, Class I, B, C&D; Class II, EF&G; Class III ........................................................................................... ➀ • External Epoxy Finish .......................................................................................................................................................... ➀ • Internal and External Epoxy Finish ...................................................................................................................................... ➀ • Additional control contacts, N.O. or N.C. – for single speed, non-reversing starters only (number limited by design of starter. Details on specific makes and sizes on request.) Aux. Contacts on starter 1 N.O. & 1 N.C.............................................................................................................................. ➁ Aux. Contacts on starter 2 N.O. & 2 C............................................................................................................................... ➁ Aux. Contacts on starter 3 N.O. & 3 N.C............................................................................................................................ ➁ 12 Point Term. Block – 30 Amp, 300V ............................................................................................................................... ➀ • General Purpose Control Relay, 4 Pole N.O., contacts rated 10A @ 600V, coil 120VAC, 50–60 Hz ............................... ➀ Suffix CL CM FTPS100 FTPS200 FTPS300 J1➂ J3➂ 0 PB23➂‡ RR2➂‡ RR3➂‡ R11 R22 R44 S1 S756‡ S756V‡ S752 S753 ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. ➂ When specifying non-standard markings on any one of the following options with Spectrum™ EBM Motor Controls (J1, J3, PB23, RR2, RR3) it is necessary to order DSL Legend Plates for identification and marking of the device(s) being used. See page 433 for DSL Legend Plate listings. * Use of this option with NEMA/EEMAC Size 0 or 1 starters necessitates a larger enclosure. Use "B" size enclosures. Example: Without Starter Enclosure Enclosure for Cat. # EBMSFA S787 EBMSFB CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 452 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds S781 S782 S783 S786 S787* EBMS Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures Single-Speed Non-Reversing 3-Pole 60 hertz, 600 VAC Maximum Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 2C Ordering Information: • To order an enclosure complete with motor starter, insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated position (see ‡) of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes. • Also specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters. • Enclosures without starters may be ordered. Select from the listings below. EBMS Series Enclosures for Magnetic Line Starters Single Speed Non-Reversing Motor Starter Enclosure Without Starter Cat. # With Starter Cat. # § Volts NEMA Size 2 120 0 EBMSFA EBMS0FA ➀613 3 3 120 240 1 0 EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMS1FA ➀613 EBMS0FA ➀623 5 5 480 600 0 0 EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMS0FA ➀643 EBMS0FA ➀663 71/2 71/2 120 240 2 1 EBMSFB EBMSFA EBMS2FB ➀613 EBMS1FA ➀623 10 10 480 600 1 1 EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMS1FA ➀643 EBMS1FA ➀663 15 15 120 240 3 2 EBMSFH EBMSFB EBMS3FH ➀613 EBMS2FB ➀623 25 25 480 600 2 2 EBMSFB EBMSFB EBMS2FB ➀643 EBMS2FB ➀663 30 240 3 EBMSFH EBMS3FH ➀623 50 50 50 480 600 240 3 3 4 EBMSFH EBMSFH EBMSFH EBMS3FH ➀643 EBMS3FH ➀663 EBMS4FH ➀623 100 100 100 480 600 240 4 4 5 EBMSFH EBMSFH EBMSFL EBMS4FH ➀643 EBMS4FH ➀663 EBMS5FL ➀623 200 200 480 600 5 5 EBMSFL EBMSFL EBMS5FL ➀643 EBMS5FL ➀663 2C Max. HP Polyphase EBMS Series starter enclosures are available with magnetic line starters. NEMA sizes 0–5. ➀Motor starters: Manufacturer Allen Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer Symbol AB D G W ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. § Motor starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 453 2C EBMS Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 2C Dimensions (In Inches) Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. Single-Speed Non-Reversing Sizes 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 Starters Enclosure Enclosure Only Size Cat. # Symbol Size 0,1 FVNR Starter§ EBMSFA A A B C D E F G J** Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T■ w/RE K L M N O 18.25 17.25 19.00 6.00 12.63 14.38 12.13 2" 1.5" 3.25 3.13 10.25 — — Size 2 FVNR Starter EBMSFB B 25.75 24.75 26.50 6.00 12.63 14.38 12.13 2" 1.5" 3.25 3.13 10.25 — — Size 3,4 FVNR Starter EBMSFD† D EBMSFH H 28.25 37.50 27.25 36.50 29.00 38.25 6.00 6.00 12.63 14.25 14.06 16.00 12.13 13.54 3" 3" 2.5" 2.5" 3.25 3.25 3.13 3.94 10.25 11.66 — — — — Size 5 FVNR Starter EBMSFK† K EBMSFL L 43.12 53.25 41.50 51.50 42.25 52.88 12.00 12.00 17.25 17.50 19.88 20.18 11.00 15.00 (2) 3" (2) 4" (2) 2.5" (2) 3.5" 3.25 4.00 3.00 3.50 10.78 13.03 — 41.50 — 18.00 §Use EBMSFB enclosure when S787 option is ordered with size 0 or 1 starter. *1" Drilled & Tapped conduit entry for control conductors supplied with PLG plug (top & bottom) **Conduit entrance for power conductors (top and bottom). (All conduit entrances supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.) †For Cutler-Hammer W200 Advantage® starters. ■Drilled & Tapped. ‡ Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 454 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Spectrum™ EBM Enclosures Supplied with Cutler-Hammer Advantage™ Starters Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 2C Applications: Spectrum EBM-E series of hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: • For general motor control – indoors and outdoors – in damp, wet, dirty, dusty hazardous locations without the need for a protective shelter. • In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent. • For across-the-line starting and stopping of polyphase AC induction motors. • To provide motor overload and undervoltage protection. • On switchracks or other assemblies where it's desired that motor control be centrally located. • Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code® • Solid state electronic Cutler-Hammer Advantage™ starter. • Smaller enclosures required than for conventional starter applications. • Elimination of heater elements, contact chatter, and welding due to low voltage supply. • Precise overcurrent protection and constant coil power. • Same performance and labor-saving benefits from the versatile Spectrum EBM Enclosure product line. • Universal mounting plates and hardware for all major manufacturers' components. • Mercury switch electronic overload reset. • Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover. 2C Features: Spectrum EBM-E Series Combination Line Starter with Advantage Starter shown. Circuit breakers not provided in EBMS series. Standard Materials: • • • • • Body and cover – copper-free aluminum Operating handle – copper-free aluminum Operating shaft and bushing – stainless steel Interior parts – sheet steel, electrogalvanized Cover bolts, washers and retractile springs – stainless steel Electrical Rating Range: Certifications and Compliances: • Motor starters – NEMA sizes 1–5 • NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G, Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • UL Standards: UL1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 • NEMA: 3, 3R, 4 ‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Breather and drain entries must be plugged for NEMA 4 rating. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 455 Spectrum™ EBM Enclosures 2C Supplied with Cutler-Hammer Advantage™ Starters Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Dimensions Ordering Information – Starters In Inches: • To order an enclosure, determine the electrical requirements of the system and locate the corresponding catalog number from the chart below. • Enclosures can be ordered without starters, universal mounting plates with templates will still be provided. EBM "E" Series Enclosures for Cutler-Hammer Advantage Starters Single Speed, Non-Reversing 2C Motor Starter EBMCFM-E EBMCFK-E Enclosure Without Starter Cat. # § With Starter Cat. # Max. HP Polyphase Volts NEMA Size 1 7 /2 240 1 EBMSFA E EBMS1FA W6213 E 10 10 480 600 1 1 EBMSFA E EBMSFA E EBMS1FA W6413 E EBMS1FA W6613 E 15 240 2 EBMSFA E EBMS2FA W6213 E 25 25 480 600 2 2 EBMSFA E EBMSFA E EBMS2FA W6413 E EBMS2FA W6613 E 30 240 3 EBMSFD E EBMS3FD W6213 E 50 50 50 240 480 600 4 3 3 EBMSFD E EBMSFD E EBMSFD E EBMS4FD W6213 E EBMS3FD W6413 E EBMS3FD W6613 E 100 100 100 240 480 600 5 4 4 EBMSFK E EBMSFD E EBMSFD E EBMS5FK W6213 E EBMS4FD W6413 E EBMS4FD W6613 E 200 200 480 600 5 5 EBMSFK E EBMSFK E EBMS5FK W6413 E EBMS5FK W6613 E Options: (Starter only) • See page 439 for options for the EBM enclosures supplied with Cutler-Hammer Advantage starters. The following suffixes cannot be ordered with this style equipment: 0, S1. Enclosure Only Cat. # Dimensions In Inches: A G **J Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T† w/RE B C D F EBMSFA E 18.25 17.25 19.40 6.00 14.78 K L 12.13 2" 1.5" 3.25 EBMSFD E 28.25 27.25 29.40 6.00 3.13 14.46 12.13 3" 2.5" 3.25 3.13 EBMSFK E 43.12 41.50 42.65 12.00 20.58 15.00 (2) 3" (2) 2.5" 2.50 3.00 "H" – Use 1/2" diameter bolts for all enclosures listed above. *1" Drilled & Tapped conduit entry for control conductors supplied with PLG plug (top & bottom). **Conduit entrance for power conductors (top & bottom). (All conduit entrances supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.) †Drilled & Tapped. ‡ Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Breather and drain entries must be plugged for NEMA 4 rating. § Note: "Enclosures only" are supplied with necessary operators, linkages, and mercury switch electronic overload resets. Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 456 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EPC Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Applications: Standard Finishes: EPC magnetic line starters and enclosures are used: • For across-the-line starting of polyphase AC induction motors • In locations made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts • In damp, wet or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To provide motor running protection, undervoltage protection, and remote starting and stopping • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural • Sheet steel – electrogalvanized with chromate finish Features: Options: • Quick-opening covers – less than two turns to remove or install • Three section design for ease of installation • Water-shedding construction with female threads on top cover, male threads on bottom cover, and top cover skirted • Specially located stops and locks ensure adequate thread engagement and prevent overtightening • Separate replaceable mounting bracket attached to the rear of the body provides three-point suspension for quick installation and leveling – one keyhole slot at top and two open slots at bottom • Bodies have two taper tapped conduit hubs with integral bushings on the top, and two more directly below • Universal mounting plate and reset mechanism will accommodate any of the motor starters in catalog listing • When interior mounting plate is removed, line and load conductors are easily pulled into the wiring chamber. The interior assembly with starter attached is then replaced, final connections made, and covers assembled • Furnished with third overload relay as standard The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. No. and many are available in kit form for field addition to existing units: See page 459 for listing of kits • NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Cl. III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Standard Materials: Electrical Rating Range: • Starter Sizes 0 to 1 inclusive 2C Certifications and Compliances: 2C Description Suffix Control circuit transformer 600/480/240–120 volts, 50 or 60 hertz (Sizes 0 and 1 – 50VA, 100VA) Fusible – Secondary ..................................................... FT Primary and secondary ............................................................................................. FTPS Automatic reset overload relay ....................................................................................... S1 Less overload relays (lighting contactor) ........................................................................ CL Less overload relays (motor contactor) .......................................................................... CM Auxiliary Contacts:* 1NO/1NC ................................................................................................................... S781 2NO/2NC ................................................................................................................... S782 3NO/3NC ................................................................................................................... S783 Pilot light holes drilled, tapped and plugged for future addition of pilot lights – one hole ..................................................................................................................... S541 two holes ................................................................................................................... S542 Side bosses drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs ....................................... S366 Back boss drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs .......................................... S367 Standard Breather (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) .............................. S219 Standard Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ........................................ S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ................... S198V Universal Breather-Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) ................................... S454‡ (2) Universal-Breather Drains (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) ............................S454V‡ Pushbuttons (heavy duty): START-STOP ............................................................................................................. PB3‡ Selector switches (standard duty): ON-OFF ..................................................................................................................... RR2‡ HAND-OFF-AUTO...................................................................................................... RR3‡ Pilot lights: Red, 120 volt .............................................................................................................. J1 Green, 120 volt ........................................................................................................... J3 Pilot light transformers: 240 volt† .................................................................................................................... T2 480 volt† .................................................................................................................... T4 600 volt† .................................................................................................................... T5 Space heaters: 120 volt ...................................................................................................................... R11 240 volt ...................................................................................................................... R22 480 volt ...................................................................................................................... R44 *Application limited by starter or contactor design – consult factory. †Required for pilot lights on other than 120 volt control circuits. One required for each lamp. ‡Not suitable for NEMA 4. CHS Controls AB • Bodies and covers – copper-free aluminum • Reset handle – copper-free aluminum • Reset shaft – stainless steel • Interior parts – stainless steel Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 457 2C EPC Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Ordering Information: To order an enclosure complete with starter, insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnote at the bottom of this page. Specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings. Motor Starter Enclosure 2C Max. HP NEMA/EEMAC Hub Polyphase Volts Size Size in. 2 3 3 5 5 71/2 10 10 120 120 240 480 600 240 480 600 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 Without With Int. Starter Starter Dia. in. Cat. # Cat. # § 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC970 EPC971 EPC970 EPC970 EPC970 EPC971 EPC971 EPC971 ➀613 ➀613 ➀623 ➀643 ➀653 ➀623 ➀643 ➀653 ➀Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer Symbol AB G D W Dimensions In Inches*: Single-Speed Non-Reversing Sizes 0, 1, Starters Int. Dia. a b c d e f g h j k l m n p EPC97 EPC97-FT EPC97-FTPS 7" 7" Dimensions Dimensions† 105/ 8 1913/ 16 2513/ 16 1411/ 16 63/ 4 711/ 16 53/ 8 2 4 73/ 8 21/ 16 93/ 8 51/ 4 11/ 4 105/ 8 2413/ 16 3713/ 16 1411/ 16 113/ 4 711/ 16 53/ 8 9 4 73/ 8 21/ 16 93/ 8 51/ 4 11/ 4 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction. †For units with Control Circuit Transformer (suffix FT or FTPS). § Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified. 458 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EPC Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures 2C Special Feature Kits Pushbutton Station and Selector Switch Kits EPC magnetic line starter and EPC combination line starter enclosures are provided as standard with switch operating shaft holes drilled, tapped and plugged. Pushbutton stations and selector switches can be assembled in these enclosures in the field, using kits listed below. Applies to 7" and 11" EPC Cat. # EPC PB3 KIT Replacement pushbutton station only for EPC-PB3-KIT 16320 N ON-OFF selector switch assembly (2 position) EPC RR2 KIT Replacement switch only for EPC-RR2-KIT ESWP126 HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch assembly (3 position) EPC RR3 KIT Replacement switch only for EPC-RR3-KIT ESWP126 When EPC magnetic line starter and EPC combination line starter enclosures have been ordered with pilot light holes drilled, tapped and plugged (Cat. No. suffix S541 and S542), pilot lights can be assembled in the field, using kits listed below. Description Pilot light assembly less transformer Applies to 7", 11" EPC Pilot light assemblies with 7" EPC only transformer and transformer mounting strap (for single pilot light) suffix S541 11" EPC only 2 pilot light assemblies with 2 transformers and transformer mounting strap (for double pilot light) suffix S542 Replacement pilot light transformer only (240V primary) Replacement pilot light transformer only (480V primary) Replacement pilot light transformer only (600V primary) Cat. # EMP015 ➀ KIT EPC87 ➀ ➁ KIT EPC813 ➀ ➁ KIT 2C Description START-STOP pushbutton station assembly Pilot Light Kits 7" EPC only EPC87 ➀ ➀ ➁ KIT 11" EPC only EPC813 ➀ ➀ ➁ KIT All units 15129 A All units 15130 A All units 15131 A ➀Insert color symbol from table below and ➁add primary voltage symbol Example: EPC87-➀-➀-➁-KIT with red and green pilot lights for 480 volts is EPC-J1-J3-T4-KIT. Color Red Green Amber Symbol Color Symbol J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11 Voltage 240 480 600 Symbol T2 T4 T5 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 459 EMN Series Manual Line Starters and Enclosures 2C Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 600VAC Maximum Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 2C CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Applications: Options: EMN manual line starters and enclosures are used: • For manual across-the-line starting of single and polyphase AC motors • To provide motor running protection and manual starting and stopping • In locations made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases, or high combustible dusts • For installation in petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, and other process industry facilities • In damp, wet, or corrosive locations The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Standard Breather (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ........ S219 Standard Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ............ S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ................................................ S198V Universal Breather-Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) .... S454 (2) Universal Breather-Drains (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) .... S454V Ordering Information: Features: • Compact, rectangular enclosure makes optimum use of internal space • Operating handle may be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" position • Compact design allows installation in area where space is limited • Furnished with drilled and tapped conduit openings • Polyphase manual starters are furnished with third overload relay as standard Specify HP, voltage, frequency, number of phases, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters. Two pole starters require one heater; three pole starters have three heaters. Motor Starter Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 14 NEMA Size Poles (Phase) Max. AC HP Ratings 208/ 115V 240V M-0 M-1 M-1P M-0 2 2 2 3 3 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 M-1 (1PH) (1PH) (1PH) (3PH) (1PH) (3PH) 2 3 5 3 3 71/2 480/ 600V Enclosure With Starter Cat. # EMN24 W20 EMN24 W21 EMN24 W21P 5 10 EMN24 W30 EMN24 W31 Enclosure Without Starter Starter Manufacturer Enclosure Cat. #† Standard Materials: Cutler-Hammer EMN24 • Bodies, covers and toggle operator – copper-free aluminum • Operating shaft – stainless steel • Internal operating bail – sheet steel or aluminum Dimensions* In Inches: Standard Finishes: • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural • Sheet steel – electrogalvanized with chromate finish Electrical Rating Ranges: • Starter sizes 0, 1, 1P †Enclosures are furnished with two 11/ 4" drilled and tapped openings with 11/4" to 1" reducers. *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. 460 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG, 12 EFD Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures 2C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Applications: EFD manual motor starting and stopping switch enclosures are used: • For manual starting of small AC or DC motors • In locations made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts • For installation at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and in other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist Features: EFD dead end • NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG, 12 • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Without Overload Protection With Switches Switch Ratings Amps HP 2 Square D Class 2510 Type KO-1 250VAC 30 115VAC 1 3 GE TC2368S 30A., 240VAC, 7-1 / 2 hp 20A., 600VAC, 15 hp 600VAC 20 230VAC 2 460–575VAC 3 Ordering Information Through feed Dead end Poles Hub Size in. With Switch Cat. # 2 Poles Hub Size in. With Switch Cat. # /4 1 EFD218 T8 EFD318 T8 2 /4 1 EFD2419 EFD3419 3 3 Standard Materials: 3 • Bodies and covers – Feraloy iron alloy • Operating handle – type 6 / 6 nylon • Operating shaft – stainless steel Dimensions 3 ® EFDC through feed Electrical Ratings Poles Cat. # Certifications and Compliances: 2C • Enclosure is small and compact • Accurately ground flange on both body and cover for flame-tight joint • Switch can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions • Dead end (EFD) or through feed (EFDC) hubs in 3/4" to 1" size 3 /4 1 EFDC218 T8 EFDC318 T8 /4 1 EFDC2419 EFDC3419 3 In Inches: Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Type 6 / 6 nylon – natural (black) • Stainless steel – natural Options: The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix For use in Group B hazardous areas GB* Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes Hub Size 3 /4 1 Dim. "h" Dim."a" /8 1 13 7 /16 /16 15 CHS Controls AB *Add GB suffix. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening for Group B usage. www.crouse-hinds.com Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 461 2C EDS Series Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 2C Applications: Factory sealed enclosures are installed in a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled and are used: • To prevent arcing of enclosed device from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere or atmospheres external to the enclosure • In industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas, or metal handling or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust • In non-hazardous areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors Manual motor starting switch enclosures are used: • For manual starting of small AC or DC motors • To provide manual starting and stopping and, in the case of units with heaters, motor running protection EDSC2199 Standard Materials: Standard Finishes: • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy (U.S.); copper-free aluminum (Canada) • Shafts & bushings – stainless steel • Sealing enclosures – copper-free aluminum Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Type 6 / 6 nylon – black • Stainless steel – natural Dimensions Options: In Inches: Description Suffix For use in Group B hazardous areas GB* Bodies and covers (single and two gang units) – copper-free aluminum SA Side View Features: Factory sealed devices have many distinct advantages: • Reduce installation problems • Eliminate external seals • Lower installation costs • Improve safety • Mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings • Large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies • Lockout hole for padlock having 1/ 4" hasp is provided • Close tolerances in machining of wide, mating flanges and journalled shafts and bearings produce flametightness of enclosure joints • Dead end (EDS) or through feed (EDSC) hubs – 3/4" or 1" sizes EDS2299 Hub Size 3 /4 1 Dim. "h" Dim. "i" /16 /16 13 15 Front View Single gang Two gang Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Surface covers have same length and width as single & 2 gang bodies. Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. *Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 462 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDS Series Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 2C Ordering Information With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches With General Electric Switches Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 Poles Volts AC 230 Votts DC Cat. # / 4 hp 1 hp GE CR101 Y GE CR101 H 1 2 1 hp 1 hp 115–230 Votts DC Cat. # Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 115 Poles Volts AC Votts DC /4 hp A B BUL 600 TOX4 A B BUL 600 TOX5 1 2 3 Hub Poles Size in. Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 Through feed Cat. # EDS2199 ➀ EDS3199 ➀ EDSC2199 ➀ EDSC3199 ➀ 3 /4 1 EDS21100 ➀ EDS31100 ➀ EDSC21100 ➀ EDSC31100 ➀ 1 /4 1 EDS2299 ➀ EDS3299 ➀ EDSC2299 ➀ EDSC3299 ➀ 2 3 /4 1 EDS22100 ➀ EDS32100 ➀ EDSC22100 ➀ EDSC32100 ➀ 2 3 Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number 0.17 0.21 0.25 0.32 0.39 0.46 0.57 0.71 0.79 0.87 0.98 1.08 1.19 1.30 1.43 1.58 1.75 1.88 2.13 2.40 2.58 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 1 Dead end Cat. # Through feed Cat. # EDS21093 ➀ EDS31093 ➀ EDSC21093 ➀ EDSC31093 ➀ 3 /4 1 EDS21094 ➀ EDS31094 ➀ EDSC21094 ➀ EDSC31094 ➀ 1 3 /4 1 EDS22093 ➀ EDS32093 ➀ EDSC22093 ➀ EDSC32093 ➀ 2 3 /4 1 EDS22094 ➀ EDS32094 ➀ EDSC22094 ➀ EDSC32094 ➀ Two Gang Heater Table (General Electric) Heater Table (Allen-Bradley) Max. Motor Full-Load Amps Hub Size Poles in. Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 2 Two Gang 1 hp 1 hp 2C Dead end Cat. # 1 hp 1 hp Max. Motor Full-Load Amps Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number 2.92 3.09 3.32 3.77 4.16 4.51 4.93 5.43 6.03 6.83 7.72 8.24 8.9 9.6 10.8 12.0 13.5 15.2 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 P38 P39 Max. Motor Full-Load Amps Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number .48 .53 .58 .65 .71 .78 .86 .95 1.04 1.14 1.25 1.37 1.49 1.63 1.78 1.95 2.13 2.32 2.53 2.76 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 Max. Motor Full-Load Amps Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number 3.01 3.27 3.56 3.88 4.22 4.60 5.00 5.43 5.90 6.41 6.98 7.60 8.25 8.95 9.75 10.6 11.4 12.5 13.6 14.8 16.0 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G39 G40 G41 G42 ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS2199-P5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. These heaters are for motors rated 40°C continuously. For motors rated 50°C or 55°C, multiply full load motor current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted. *Add GB suffix. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening for Group B usage. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 463 EDS Series Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures 2C Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations With Cutler-Hammer Switches Maximum HP Ratings 120–240 32 Poles Volts AC Volts DC 1 2 1 hp 1 hp /4 hp /4 hp 1 1 Poles Hub Size in. Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 /4 1 3 2C 2 Two Gang 3 /4 1 1 /4 1 3 2 120 Volts DC 240 Volts DC Cat. # /4 hp 1 hp 1 1 /4 hp /4 hp WEST MST01 WEST MST02 3 Dead end Cat. # Through feed Cat. # EDS21101 ➀ EDS31101 ➀ EDSC21101 ➀ EDSC31101 ➀ EDS21102 ➀ EDS31102 ➀ EDSC21102 ➀ EDSC31102 ➀ EDS22101 ➀ EDS32101 ➀ EDSC22101 ➀ EDSC32101 ➀ EDS22102 ➀ EDS32102 ➀ EDSC22102 ➀ EDSC32102 ➀ Heater Table (Cutler-Hammer) Max. Motor Full-Load Amps Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number .43 .48 .53 .58 .64 .71 .78 .87 .95 1.03 1.15 1.27 1.35 1.51 1.67 1.83 1.99 2.23 2.47 2.71 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 Max. Motor Full-Load Amps Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number 2.95 3.27 3.59 3.99 4.39 4.79 5.26 5.83 6.39 7.03 7.74 8.46 9.35 10.30 11.35 12.47 13.67 15.12 16.00 W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39 ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS2199-P5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. These heaters are for motors rated 40°C continuously. For motors rated 50°C or 55°C, multiply full load motor current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted. CHS Controls AB *Add GB suffix. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening for Group B usage. Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 464 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds GHG 635 Series Explosion Protected Manual Motor Starters UL/cUL Listed Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, AEx de IIB + H2, T5, T6 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) 25 Amp, 690 VAC Non-metallic Enclosure CENELEC - PTB 99 ATEX 1162 Certified Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2 Ex de IIC, T6 Zones 21 and 22 IP66, NEMA 4X 2C Applications: • Explosion protected manual motor starters are used in a metallic conduit or cable system for surface mounting to protect motors against overload and phase failure. Features: Certifications and Compliances: • • • • • • • UL/cUL Listed Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB+H2, T6 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) CENELEC - PTB 99-ATEX 1162 Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2 IP66, NEMA 4X 2C • Explosion protected factory sealed circuit breaker and manual motor starter • Innovative break-line in cover allows full wiring access, making installation quick and easy • Switch handle provides clear indication of switch position • Lockable handle meets OSHA lockout/tagout requirements, provision for 3 padlocks • Large rotary handle provides easy gripping with gloved hands • Captive cover screws Technical Data Type of Protection Rated Voltage Rated Current Rated Current, Aux. Contact Short Circuit Under Voltage Trip (A)Ex ed IIC T5, T6 Up to 690 VAC Up to 25 A 2A See table on next page Tripping at 15% – 75% V-rated Switching - on when V> 80% V-rated Connection Terminals Connection Terminals, Aux. Contact Conduit or Cable Entries Weight Up to 10mm2 2 x 2.5 mm2 2 x 3/4" Myers hubs 5.5 Ibs./2.5 Kg. Standard Materials: • Enclosure - Fiberglass-reinforced polyester Nonmetallic, corrosion resistant Increased safety Ex-e protection Impact Resistant NEMA 4X, IP66 Protection Enclosure meets UL 94-VO UV rated • Enclosure Gasket - Silicon • Handle - Impact-resistant thermoplastic • Cover Screws - Stainless steel • Conduit Entries - Zinc Myers Hubs • Brass Mounting plate - Ground continuity CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 465 2C GHG 635 Series Explosion Protected Manual Motor Starters 25 Amp, 690 VAC Non-metallic Enclosure UL/cUL Listed Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, AEx de IIB + H2, T5, T6 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) CENELEC - PTB 99 ATEX 1162 Certified Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2 Ex de IIC, T6 Zones 21 and 22 IP66, NEMA 4X Short Circuit Protection Setting Range 400 VAC AIC 500 VAC AIC 690 VAC AIC 0.1 A – 1.6 A 1.6 A – 2.5 A 2.5 A – 4.0 A 4.0 A – 6.3 A 6.3 A – 9.0 A 9.0 A – 12.5 A 12.5 A – 16.0 A 16.0 A – 20.0 A 20.0 A – 25.0 A N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* 75 60 55 50 N/A* N/A* 60 40 30 27 25 22 20 N/A* 40 10 7 5 4.5 4 3.5 3 * Short-circuit proof. No back-up fuse required. 2C Ordering Information Setting Range or rated current Cat. # 0.1 – 0.16 A 0.16 – 0.25 A 0.25 – 0.40 A 0.40 – 0.63 A 0.63 – 1.0 A 1.0 – 1.6 A 1.6 – 2.5 A 2.5 – 4.0 A 4.0 – 6.3 A 6.3 – 9.0 A 9.0 – 12.5 A 12.5 – 16 A 16 – 20 A 20 – 25 A GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 L0101 L0102 L0103 L0104 L0105 L0106 L0107 L0108 L0109 L0110 L0111 L0112 L0113 L0114 Accessory Options† 1 = without aux. contact 2 = with aux. contact 1 NO + 1NC 3 = with aux. contact 2 NO †Catalog numbers on this page are shown without auxiliary contacts. To add aux. contacts, change last number in "1101" to a 2 or 3. Ex. 1102. Wiring Diagram Dimensions In Inches: CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 466 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds MC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures NEMA 3, 4, 12 Raintight Wet Locations 2C Applications: MC manual motor starting switches and enclosures are used: • For manual starting of small AC and DC motors of one horsepower or less (see next page for ratings) • In damp, wet or corrosive locations such as dairies, meat packing plants, chemical plants and outdoor locations • To provide motor running protection and manual starting and stopping Features: MC dead end 2C • Enclosure is compact and gasketed to meet NEMA/EEMAC 4 requirements for watertightness • Switch can be padlocked in either the "ON" or "OFF" positions • Provided with dead end (MC) or throughfeed (MCC) hubs – 1/2" and 3/4" sizes – with mounting feet MCC through feed Dimensions In Inches*: Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 12 • UL Standard: 508 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 14 Standard Materials: • Body and cover – Feraloy® iron alloy • Operating handle – copper-free aluminum • Operating shaft – stainless steel Standard Finishes: • Feraloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. Hub Size a b 1 /2 3 /8 5 /8 7 7 /4 /8 /4 3 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 467 2C MC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures MC Manual Motor Starting Switches Heater Table Manufacturer Poles Cat. # Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer 1 2 MST01 MST02 Full Load Motor Current .40 – .43 .44 – .48 .49 – .53 .54 – .58 .59 – .64 .65 – .71 .72 – .78 .79 – .87 .88 – .95 .96 – 1.03 1.04 – 1.15 1.16 – 1.27 1.28 – 1.35 1.36 – 1.51 1.52 – 1.67 1.68 – 1.83 1.84 – 1.99 2.00 – 2.23 2.24 – 2.47 2.48 – 2.71 2.72 – 2.95 2.96 – 3.27 3.28 – 3.59 3.60 – 3.99 4.00 – 4.39 4.40 – 4.79 4.80 – 5.26 5.27 – 5.83 5.84 – 6.39 6.40 – 7.03 7.04 – 7.74 7.75 – 8.46 8.47 – 9.35 9.36 – 10.30 10.31 – 11.35 11.36 – 12.47 12.48 – 13.67 13.68 – 15.12 15.13 – 16.00 Maximum Horsepower Ratings Volts 120 / 240 AC 32 DC 120 / 240 DC 240 DC 1-Pole 2-Pole 1 1 /4 1 1 /4 1 /4 1 Ordering Information - MC 2C NEMA 3, 4, 12 Raintight Wet Locations Single Gang (Dead End) Poles Hub Size in. Enclosure With Switch Cat. # 1 1 2 2 1 /2 /4 1 /2 3 /4 MC1211 MC2211 MC1212 MC2212 3 Without Switch Cat. # ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ MC1212B MC2212B MC1212B MC2212B Ordering Information - MCC Single Gang (Through Feed) Poles Hub Size in. Enclosure With Switch Cat. # 1 1 2 2 1 /2 /4 1 /2 3 /4 MCC1211 MCC2211 MCC1212 MCC2212 3 Without Switch Cat. # ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ MCC1212B MCC2212B MCC1212B MCC2212B Heater Rating Cooper Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number .50 .55 .61 .67 .74 .81 .89 .98 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.45 1.60 1.70 1.90 2.10 2.30 2.50 2.80 3.10 3.40 3.70 4.10 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.60 7.30 8.00 8.80 9.70 10.60 11.70 12.90 14.20 15.60 17.10 18.60 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater from table above and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: MC1211-W5. Symbol 0 (zero) may be used to indicate heater omitted. These heaters are for motors rated 40°C continuously. For motors rated 50°C or 55°C, multiply full load motor current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. 468 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 2C Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 NSSC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and NFS Series Fractional HP Starters and Enclosures Applications: • Motor Starting Switches are used in manual "ON" and "OFF" control of DC and single-phase or three-phase AC motors where overload protection is not required or is provided separately • NFSC Fractional Horsepower Starters are used in manual "ON" and "OFF" control and overload protection of small single phase motors • Both are suitable for use in wet and/or corrosive environments Features: Certifications and Compliances: 2C • Enclosures are made of Cooper CrouseHinds high-impact strength Krydon® fiberglass-reinforced polyester material which has excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat • Provided with a toggle lever with a molded-in stainless steel shaft • Factory installed through feed (NSSC, NFSC) hubs, 1/2" or 3/4" size • Indicating plate is made of stainless steel Ordering Information NSSC Series Manual Motor Starting Switch Without Overload Protection With Square D Switches Poles 2 3 Max. HP Rating 115 VAC 200–230 VAC 460–575 VAC Max. Amp. Ratings 250 VDC 600 VDC 1 2 30 30 Poles • Grounding plate or bushing – see page 646 3 10 20 20 Enclosure With Switch Hub Through Size Feed Cat. # • NEMA 3, 4X, and 12 Options: 2 71/2 /2 /4 NSSC D12 NSSC D22 /2 /4 NSSC D13 NSSC D23 1 2 3 1 3 3 Enclosures Only Enclosure Type Hub Size Through Feed Cat. # Manual Motor Starting Switch 1 /2 NSSC1 /4 NSSC2 /2 NFSC1 /4 NFSC2 3 Fractional HP Starter Dimensions* 1 3 In Inches: CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se *Dimensions are approximate. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 469 2C Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 NSSC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and NFS Series Fractional HP Starters and Enclosures Ordering Information NFSC Series Fractional HP Starters With Overload Protection With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches With General Electric Switches Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 Poles Volts AC 1 1 hp 2 1 hp Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 Poles VAC 1 1 hp 2 1 hp Poles /2 3 /4 /2 /4 Heater Table (see page 463) 1 2 2C /4 hp 3 Enclosure With Starter Hub Through Size Feed Cat. # 1 1 115–230 Volts DC 3 1 1 hp /2 /4 NFSC C12 ➀ NFSC C22 ➀ 2 Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 NFSC G12 ➀ NFSC G22 ➀ 3 115–230 Volts DC /4 hp 3 Enclosure With Starter Hub Through Size Feed Cat. # Poles /2 /4 NFSC D11 ➀ NFSC D21 ➀ /2 /4 NFSC D12 ➀ NFSC D22 ➀ 1 3 1 Heater Table (Cutler-Hammer) Max. Motor Full-Load Amps .43 .48 .53 .58 .64 .71 .78 .87 .95 1.03 1.15 1.27 1.35 1.51 1.67 1.83 1.99 2.23 2.47 2.71 NFSC G11 ➀ NFSC G21 ➀ /2 /4 Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 Poles Volts AC 1 1 hp 2 1 hp 115–230 Volts DC 1 3 3 Heater Table (Square D) Max. Motor Full-Load Amps Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number 2.95 3.27 3.59 3.99 4.39 4.79 5.26 5.83 6.39 7.03 7.74 8.46 9.35 10.30 11.35 12.47 13.67 15.12 16.00 W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39 Full-Load Motor Current 0.41–0.44 0.45–0.49 0.50–0.53 0.54–0.58 0.59–0.65 0.66–0.71 0.72–0.78 0.79–0.85 0.86–0.96 0.97–1.04 1.05–1.16 1.17–1.29 1.30–1.37 1.38–1.47 1.48–1.56 1.57–1.65 1.66–1.79 1.80–1.95 1.96–2.15 2.16–2.38 2.39–2.75 2.76–2.84 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number A.49 A.54 A.59 A.65 A.71 A.78 A.86 A.95 A1.02 A1.16 A1.25 A1.39 A1.54 A1.63 A1.75 A1.86 A1.99 A2.15 A2.31 A2.57 A2.81 A3.61 Full-Load Motor Current Cooper Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number 2.85–3.06 3.07–3.45 3.46–3.70 3.71–4.07 4.08–4.32 4.33–4.90 4.91–5.35 5.36–5.85 5.86–6.41 6.42–6.79 6.80–7.57 7.58–8.15 8.16–8.98 8.99–9.67 9.68–9.95 9.96–10.8 10.9–12.1 12.2–13.1 13.2–13.9 14.0–15.0 15.1–16.0 A3.95 A4.32 A4.79 A5.30 A5.78 A6.20 A6.99 A7.65 A8.38 A9.25 A9.85 A11.0 A11.9 A13.2 A14.1 A14.8 A16.2 A17.9 A19.8 A21.3 A25.2 ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater suffix from table and add to catalog number. Example: NFSC-D11A.49 CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 470 www.crouse-hinds.com /4 hp 1 hp With Square D Switches NFSC C11 ➀ NFSC C21 ➀ 1 2 1 /2 /4 Heater Table (see page 463) /2 /4 3 1 hp 1 hp 1 1 Enclosure With Starter Hub Through Size Feed Cat. # 1 /4 hp /4 hp 1 3 2 With Cutler-Hammer Switches Poles 230 VDC 1 1 NFSC AB12 ➀ NFSC AB22 ➀ Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 Poles Volts AC 1 1 hp 2 1 hp 115 VDC Enclosure With Starter Hub Through Size Feed Cat. # Poles NFSC AB11 ➀ NFSC AB21 ➀ 32 VDC US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds NMN Series Manual Line Starters and Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 600VAC Heavy Duty Applications: Electrical Rating Ranges: • NMN manual line starters are for use in across-the-line starting of motors, motor protection and manual starting and stopping. • Starter sizes 0, 1, 1P 2C Options: Description Suffix • Undervoltage protection. Available with toggle operator only ................................................ U • Grounding plate – see page 646. • Insulated, groundable type terminal block for grounded or ungrounded neutral can be supplied ......................................... S618 Features: • Enclosures are made of Cooper CrouseHinds high-impact strength Krydon® fiberglass-reinforced polyester material which has excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat. • Factory installed dead end (NMN) or through feed (NMNC) hubs, 3/4" and 1" sizes. 2C Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA/EEMAC 3, 4X and 12 Toggle-operated manual starter with knockout Ordering Information Enclosure with Starter 3 /4" Hubs Starter NEMA Size Poles Max. HP 115V 230V M-0 M-1 M-1P M-0 M-1 2 2 2 3 3 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 (1 (1 (1 (3 (1 (3 PH) PH) PH) PH) PH) PH) 2 3 5 3 3 71/2 460/575V Dead End Cat # 5 NMN NMN NMN NMN 10 NMN ➀231 ➀220 ➀221 ➀221P ➀230 1" Hubs Through Feed Cat # NMNC NMNC NMNC NMNC ➀220 ➀221 ➀221P ➀230 Dead End Cat # NMN NMN NMN NMN ➀320 ➀321 ➀321P ➀330 Through Feed Cat # NMNC NMNC NMNC NMNC ➀320 ➀321 ➀321P ➀330 NMNC ➀231 NMN ➀331 NMNC ➀300 Enclosure Only* NMN ➀200 NMNC ➀200 NMN ➀300 NMNC ➀300 ➀Motor Starters: Insert appropriate symbol in Cat. No. Manufacturer Symbol Allen-Bradley AB General Electric G Square D D Dimensions In Inches: CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se NMN *Furnished with mounting plate and operator installed. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 471 2C Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 NMG Series Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures 600VAC Heavy Duty Applications: NMG magnetic line starters are used: • For magnetic across-the-line starting of motors and remote starting and stopping • For across-the-line starting of polyphase AC induction motors • To provide motor running protection, undervoltage protection and remote starting and stopping 2C Features: • Enclosures are made of Cooper CrouseHinds high-impact strength Krydon® fiberglass-reinforced polyester material which has excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat. • Unitized, strong and durable enclosure construction provides longer service life for equipment. • Exterior parts of RESET button made of Krydon material. Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4X and 12 Electrical Rating Ranges: • Starter sizes 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Magnetic line starter with optional hinged cover with START-STOP pushbuttons. Options: Description Hinged cover..................................... Pilot lights, 120 V primary – specify other primary voltages as required: Red pilot light............................... Green pilot light............................ LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps................. Pushbutton (heavy duty, uses two device holes): START-STOP.............................. Selector switches (heavy duty): ON-OFF........................................ HAND-OFF-AUTO........................ JOG-RUN-OFF............................. Padlock attachment for: Pushbutton.................................. Control circuit transformer 480 / 240-120 volts, 50 or 60 hertz, (sizes 0 and 1–50VA, size 2–100VA, size 3–150VA, size 4–300VA): Fusible Secondary................................... Primary and Secondary............... Automatic reset overload relay.......... Less overload relays (contactor)........ Auxiliary Contact on Starter or Contactor: 1NO/1NC..................................... 2NO/2NC..................................... 3NO/3NC..................................... Suffix NH J1* J3* LED PB13* RR17* RR18* RR19* S708 Description Suffix Time delay low voltage release for 3-wire control with 2, 4 or 6-second adjustment. For single-speed, nonreversing starters only. Control circuit voltage: 120 volt, 60 hertz............................ LVR1 240 volt, 60 hertz............................ LVR2 480 volt, 60 hertz............................ LVR3 Hubs (see "Note on Hubs") – see page 646 Grounding plate or bushing† – see page 646 Insulated, groundable type terminal block for a grounded or ungrounded neutral can be supplied..................... S618 Information on other options or combination of options for a specific enclosure size is available on request. FT FTPS S1 C S781 S782 S783 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se †Type GP grounding plate only in NMG0710 enclosure. *For optional devices or control circuit transformer, use next larger enclosure size. For NMG0714, two device holes maximum. 472 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds NMG Series Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information Dimensions† To order an enclosure complete with starter, insert the manufacturer’s symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnote at the bottom of this page. Specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor – or specify ampere rating of heaters. In Inches: 2C Starters are furnished with three heaters. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings. Single-Speed, Non-Reversing Motor Starter Enclosure Max. HP Volts NEMA With Polyphase (AC) Size Starter Cat. # 120 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 240 240 480 600 480 600 0 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0714 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG1018 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1018 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1024 ➀6130 ➀6131 ➀6230 ➀6430 ➀6530 ➀6132 ➀6231 ➀6431 ➀6531 ➀6133 ➀6232 ➀6432 ➀6532 ➀6233 ➀6234* ➀6433 ➀6533 ➀6434* ➀6534* NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0714 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG1018 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1018 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1024 NMG0710 & 0714 2C 2 3 3 5 5 71/2 71/2 10 10 15 15 25 25 30 50 50 50 100 100 Without Starter Cat. # NMG1018 & 1024 *NEMA Size 4 Allen-Bradley starter must be in NMG1426 enclosure. ➀ Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley Square D Cutler-Hammer General Electric Westinghouse Enclosure Cat. # Outside Dimensions l w d Mounting Dimensions ml mw NMG0710 NMG0714 NMG1018 NMG1024 101/2 141/2 1913/32 2513/32 93/8 133/8 193/8 253/8 Symbol AB D C G W Information on other starter manufacturers on request. Ordering Information when adding options 71/2 71/2 1113/32 1113/32 7 7 823/32 823/32 63/8 63/8 77/8 77/8 †Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. When adding options to NMG series enclosures, the base catalog number must be changed according to the table below. NEMA Enclosure Enclosure Size Cat. # w/Options 0, 1 NMG0710 NMG0714 2 NMG0714 NMG1018 3 NMG1018 NMG1024 4 NMG1024 NMG1426 Example: A NEMA size 4, 480 V Westinghouse starter with STARTSTOP pushbuttons would be Cat. No. NMG1426-W6434-PB13. Note on Hubs: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when magnetic starters are ordered complete. If enclosures only are ordered, hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options"). Starter Size 0 3 Number Included Hub Size 3 1 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 4 /4 /4 1 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se /4 11/2 /4 2 /4 21/2 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 473 2C CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 474 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Circuit Breakers Hazardous 3C Description Page No. Application/Selection see page 476 Auxiliary Circuit Breakers & Enclosures see page 493 EFD, EFDC Series Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers & Enclosures General Information and Dimensions see pages 482–483 see page 487 see pages 478–481 EPC Series FLB Series EBMB Series Non-Interchangeable Trip EPC Series FLB Series EBMB Series EIB Series NCB Series see see see see see page page page page page 484 488 480 477 494 see see see see page page page page 486 492 480 495 225 / 250 ampere frame EPC Series FLB Series EBMB Series NCB Series 400 ampere frame see page 480 EBMB Series Interchangeable Trip 225 / 250 ampere frame see page 492 see page 480 FLB Series EBMB Series 400 ampere frame see page 480 see page 495 EBMB Series NCB Series 600 / 800 ampere frame see page 480 EBMB Series 1000 ampere frame see page 480 EBMB Series CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 475 3C 100 / 150 ampere frame Circuit Breakers 3C CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart Applications: Circuit breakers and their appropriate enclosures are used: • In conjunction with service entrance, lighting, heating, appliance and motor protection circuits • To provide disconnect means • For short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection • In various types of damp, wet, corrosive and hazardous areas Considerations for Selection: Options: Considerations for selection of proper enclosure: • The environment of the enclosure location in terms of NEC/CEC compliance and NEMA/EEMAC type required • The size and type of circuit breaker required for the particular application • See "Quick Selector" below for guidance Many options are available on: • Material and finishes where special atmospheric conditions prevail • Special features for specific applications. See individual listings for available options 3C Quick Selector Chart Enclosures for Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker NEC/CEC – Hazardous Area Certifications and Compliances Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/ EEMAC Encl. Type 3, 7BCD, 9EFG Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div, 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III 3, 7CD, 9EFG EIB Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. III 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG Magnetic 15–100 NCB N/A 3, 4X, 12 ThermalMagnetic 15-400 Encl. EFD, EFDC EBMB EPC FLB 476 Type ThermalMagnetic ThermalMagnetic Ampere Rating Range 15–30 15–800 Voltage Range 120AC Manufacturer and Frame Size Sq. D – QOU No. of Poles 1 Interchangeable Trip No 120AC to 600AC G.E. – TEB, TED, TFJ, TFK, TJJ, TJK, TKMA Sq. D – FAL, KAL, LAL, MAL Cut.-Ham. – EHD, FD, FDB, JD, JDB, KD, KDB, 1, 2, 3 Yes Bolted/ Ground Joint/ Gasketed G.E. – TEB, TED, TFJ Sq. D – FAL, KAL Cut.-Ham. – EHD, FD, FDB, JD, JDB 1, 2, 3 Yes Threaded G.E. – TEB, TED, TFJ, TFK Sq. D – FAL, KAL Cut.-Ham. – EHD, FD, FDB, JD, JDB 1, 2, 3 Yes Threaded 480AC to 600AC Cut. Ham. – EG 3 No Bolted/ Ground Joint 240AC to 600VAC 250DC G.E. – TEB, TED, TFJ Sq. D – FAL, KAL, LAL Cut.-Ham. – EB, EHB, EHD, FD, FDB, JD, JDB 2, 3 Yes Hinged, screw and gasket 125DC to 250DC ThermalMagnetic 15–250 120AC to 600AC 125DC to 250DC ThermalMagnetic 15–225 120AC to 600AC 125DC to 250DC www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Enclosure Cover Construction Bolted/ Ground Joint Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 cUL to CSA C22.2 No. 30 EIB Series Compact Circuit Breaker Assemblies With Covers The EIB Series Compact Circuit Breaker Assemblies are an innovative line of explosionproof motor control now being offered by Cooper Crouse-Hinds. The EIB series utilizes the EJB style D enclosure with its bolted construction, NEMA 4 environmental protection and Class I, Division 1, Group B, C and D hazardous area ratings. The EIB series is a costeffective solution for circuit breaker protection and utilizes the Cutler-Hammer Type EG circuit breakers. Circuit breaker protection is available from 15 to 100 amps. Options: Features: • 480 volts, 600 volts • 3 poles • 10,000 AIC max. Description Suffix Insulated Neutral Lug ....................... S146 Grounded Neutral Lug Kit with Connectors for 50, 100 & 225 Amps ................................................ S178 External Ground Stud ...................... S214 Breather and Drain .......................... S756V Epoxy Powder Coat Finish (exterior only) ................................... S752 Epoxy Powder Coat Finish (exterior and interior) ........................ S753 Electrical Ratings: Weights: Ordering Information Circuit Breaker Rating (amps) Enclosure Enclosure with Only Circuit Breaker 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 EIBA EIBA EIBA EIBA EIBA EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBA EIBB EIBA3015 EIBA3020 EIBA3025 EIBA3030 EIBA3035 EIBB3040 EIBB3045 EIBB3050 EIBB3060 EIBB3070 EIBB3080 EIBB3090 EIBB3100 3C • Small compact footprint requires less mounting space and reduces enclosure cost • Rotary handle operator mounted on cover assembly provides clear indication of on, off and trip positions • No internal fork operator, eliminating potential damage to breaker toggle • Trip position easily identified from a distance • Neoprene cover gasket provides UL Type 4 (hosetight) environmental rating • Detachable mounting feet offer flexible mounting alternatives - no need to replace the entire enclosure if a mounting foot is broken • Stainless steel hinges provide extreme durability and easy access to inside of enclosure for wiring and maintenance • (2) 11/2" NPT conduit entries, one on top and one on bottom for easy top or bottom feed of conductors. For field addition of breather and/or drain; holes come plugged 3C 39 lbs. 58 lbs. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Dimensions In Inches: Certifications and Compliances: • • • • • • • • Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups B, C & D Class I, Zones 1 & 2 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Class III Enclosure type 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard 886 cUL to CSA C22.2 No. 30 Standard Materials: • • • • • Body and Cover – Copper-free aluminum Gasket – Neoprene Cover Bolts – Steel Hinges – Stainless Steel Mounting Plate Sheet – Aluminum Finishes: Dimension aa bb xx yy zz Mounting Holes Size A Size B 10.47" 12.47" 11.13" 5.0" 9.6" 7 /16" 12.53" 16.53" 15.13" 7.0" 11.66" 7 /16" • Copper-free Aluminum – Natural • Steel – Electrogalvanized www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 477 3C EBMB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Applications: Spectrum™ EBM hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: • For general motor control and circuit protection – indoors and outdoors – in damp, wet, dirty, dusty hazardous locations without the need for a protective shelter. • In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent. • To provide line disconnect means and short circuit protection. • For service entrance, feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting, heating, appliance and motor circuits. • On switchracks or other assemblies where it’s desired that motor control be centrally located. 3C Features: • Rugged, corrosion resistant, cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1%). • Circuit breaker operating handle located through the right side wall of the body permits visual confirmation of correct component assembly and operation. • Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code®. • Semi-clamshell enclosure design, with an external flanged ground joint between body and cover makes interior components more accessible. • Minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between the opened cover and an adjacent enclosure. • Copper-free aluminum hinges allow the cover to swing well out of the way. • Stainless steel, quick release, captive, hex head cover bolts. Stainless steel springs provide clear indication cover bolts are fully retracted from body. • Versatile, internal operating mechanisms allow for field adjustment to accommodate popular manufacturers' breakers. • Simple, straightforward installation of breaker on pre-drilled mounting plate within enclosure. Mounting plate also field removable. • Circuit breaker external operating handle can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions. • Neoprene cover gasket permanently attached to the cover seals out moisture. • Bodies have top and bottom drilled and tapped entrances for power conduits and control conduits. Removable reducers are supplied, as standard, to accommodate smaller size conduits. All conduit entrances are plugged. • Tap-on mounting feet. • Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover. • Steel bracket for lifting larger enclosures during installation supplied as standard. Spectrum EBM motor control enclosures accommodate popular makes of circuit breakers. Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • UL Standards UL1203 – Hazardous (classified) locations/CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 30 • UL Subject 2062 - High AIC rating (Interrupting Capacity) For Groups C & D only 240V 65,000 RMS Symm. Amperes 480V 50,000 RMS Symm. Amperes 600V 25,000 RMS Symm. Amperes • NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Standard Materials: • Body and cover – copper-free aluminum • Operating handle – copper-free aluminum • Operating shaft and bushing – stainless steel • Interior parts – sheet steel, electrogalvanized • Cover bolts, washers and retractile springs – stainless steel CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Electrical Rating Ranges: • Circuit breakers – 100, 150, 225, 250, 400, 600, 800, 1000* ampere frame sizes ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. *1000 Ampere Frame (max. 800 ampere trip) National Electrical Code is a Registered Trademark of The National Fire Protection Association. 478 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EBMB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 3C Options: The following options are available from factory by adding suffix to catalog number. Suffixes are added alphanumerically. Catalog Number System EBMBB-➀-WT30FDB36-➁ ➀ Options in this position are additions to the enclosure and should be listed alphanumerically. ➁ Options in this position are modifications to the circuit breaker and should be listed alphanumerically. Description Position in Cat. # Suffix ➁ AC ➀ J1† ➀ J3 † ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ LED PB23 †‡ R11 R22 R44 S146 ➀ S178 ➀ S756 ‡ ➀ ➀ ➀ S756V ‡ S752 S753 ➁ S784 ➁ ➀ S785 S786 ➀ S787 3C • Ambient compensated circuit breaker trip setting...................................................................... • Pilot light, 120VAC, red jewel, w/blank indicating plate......................................................................... • Pilot light, 120VAC, green jewel, w/blank indicating plate......................................................... • LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps................................................................ • Start-stop pushbuttons (requires 2 spaces).............. • Space heater, 120 volt, 25 watts............................... • Space heater, 240 volt, 25 watts............................... • Space heater, 480 volt, 25 watts............................... • Insulated neutral w/2 connectors.............................. • Grounded neutral stud w/3 connectors (50, 100, 225 amp)................................................... • Std. drain, Class I, B, C & D; Class II, E F & G, Class III..................................................................... • Std. breather & drain, Class I, B, C & D; Class II, E, F & G; Class III..................................................... • External epoxy finish................................................. • Internal and external epoxy finish.............................. • Aux. switch on circuit breaker, 1A & 1B contacts................................................................... • Aux. switch on circuit breaker, 2A & 2B contacts................................................................... • 12 point term. block – 30 amp, 300 V..................... • General purpose control relay, 4 pole N.O., contacts rated 10A @ 600V, coil 120VAC, 50–60 Hertz......................................................................... EBMB Series circuit breaker enclosures are available with breakers from 100 to 1000* amp frame sizes. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se *1000 Ampere Frame (max. 800 ampere trip.) †If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. To select from the list of standard markings and DSL Legend Plate listings see page 433. ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 479 EBMB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 3C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Ordering Information: • To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker, insert the manufacturer's symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown below. • Enclosures can be ordered without circuit breakers. Select from listings below. EBMB Series Enclosures for Circuit Breakers 3C Circuit Breaker Enclosures Poles✠ Voltage Rating Circuit Breaker Frame Size 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 240VAC 240VAC 480VAC 480VAC 600VAC 600VAC 240VAC 240VAC 480VAC 480VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 250 Amp. Frame 400 Amp. Frame 600 Amp. Frame 800 Amp. Frame 1000 Amp. Frame or or or or 125–250VDC 125–250VDC 250VDC 250VDC or or or or 125–250VDC 125–250VDC 250VDC 250VDC or or or or 250VDC 250VDC 250VDC 250VDC ➀Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer Symbol Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D WT TT DT Without Circuit Breaker Cat. # EBMBA EBMBA EBMBA EBMBA EBMBA EBMBA EBMBB EBMBB EBMBB EBMBB EBMBB EBMBB EBMBG EBMBK EBMBL EBMBL EBMBL * † § * † § * † § ■ * † § * † § * † § ■ ✪ ▲ ▼ ♠ ♥ Circuit Breaker Amp Rating With Circuit Breaker Cat. # 15A through 70A 10A through 70A 15A through 70A 10A through 70A 15A through 70A 10A through 70A 15A through 100A 10A through 150A 15A through 100A 10A through 150A 15A through 100A 15A through 150A 70A through 250A 100A through 400A 250A through 600A 300A through 800A 125A through 800A (max.) EBMBA DT➁FAL32 EBMBA TT➁TEB32 EBMBA ➀➁➂34 EBMBA TT➁TED34 EBMBA DT➁FAL36 EBMBA ➀➁➂36 EBMBB DT➁FAL32 EBMBB TT➁TEB32 EBMBB ➀➁➂34 EBMBB TT➁TED34 EBMBB DT➁FAL36 EBMBB ➀➁➂36 EBMBG ➀➁➂36 EBMBK ➀➁➂36 EBMBL WT➁➂36 EBMBL WT➁➂36 EBMBL DT➁➂36 ➁ Select Trip Setting from below: 100 Amp Frame (EHD, FAL)* – 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 150 Amp. Frame (TDB, TEB, TED)†§■ – 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150 225 / 250 Amp Frame (JD, JDB, KAL, TFJ, TFK)✪▲ – 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 400 Amp. Frame (KD, KDB, LAL, TJJ, TJK)▼ – 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 600 Amp. Frame (LD, TJK)♠ – 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 800 Amp Frame (MD, TKMA)♥ – 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 1000 Amp Frame (MAL) – 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 ➂Select Circuit Breaker Frame Type based on frame size, voltage, and manufacturer desired: Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D 100 Amp. Frame 240VAC 480VAC 250 Amp. 400 Amp. 600 Amp. 800 Amp. 1000 Amp. 150 Amp. Frame Frame✪▲ Frame Frame Frame Frame 600VAC 240VAC 480VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC — EHD — — — FDB JD✡ JDB✜ KD✡ KDB✜ LD MD — TEB — — — TED TED TFK✡ TFJ✜ TJK✡ TJJ✜ TJK TKMA — FAL FAL FAL — — — KAL LAL — — MAL ✡–Interchangeable Trip Unit ✜–Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit ‡ Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. ✠ Depending on availability from the circuit breaker manufacturer 1 and 2 pole can be furnished. Information available upon request. Example of an adjusted part number - EBMBB WT100EDH34 becomes EBMBB WT100EDH24. * EBMBA will accept 15 through 70 amp. trip, EBMBB will accept 15 through 100 amp. trip. † EBMBA will accept 10 through 70 amp. trip, EBMBB will accept 10 through 150 amp. trip. § General Electric TEB frame available 10 through 100 amp. trip. TED frame available 10 through 150 amp. trip. ■ Westinghouse FDB frame available 15 through 150 amp. trip. ✪ General Electric TFJ and TFK types are 225 amp. frame, available 70 though 225 amp. trip. ▲ Westinghouse JD and JDB types are 250 amp. frame, available 70, 90, 100 and 125 through 250 amp. trip. ▼ Westinghouse KD and KDB frames available 100 through 400 amp. trip. Square D LAL and General Electric TJJ and TJK frames available 125 through 400 amp. trip. ♠ Westinghouse LD frame available 300 through 400 and 500, 600 amp. trip. ♥ Westinghouse MD frame available 400 and 500 through 800 amp. trip. CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 480 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4‡, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 EBMB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 3C Dimensions In Inches: 3C Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. * 1" Drilled & Tapped (D & T) conduit entry for control conductors supplied with PLG plug top and bottom. ** Conduit entrance(s) for power conductors (top and bottom). (All conduit entrance(s) supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.) *** Use 1/2" diameter bolts for mounting all enclosures. (see H) Note: Lifting bracket will accommodate a maximum 2 ton hook. Enclosure Enclosure Only Size Cat. # Symbol 100 Amp Frame EBMBA A Dimensions A B C D E F G J** Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T§ w/RE Dimensions K L M N O P 18.25 17.25 19.40 6.00 13.03 14.78 10.25 2" 1.5" 3.25 3.13 10.25 — — 14.50 100 and 150 Amp Frame EBMBB B 25.75 24.75 26.90 6.00 13.03 14.78 10.25 2" 1.5" 3.25 3.13 10.25 — — 22.00 225 and 250 Amp Frame EBMBG G 37.50 36.50 39.28 6.00 13.03 14.78 10.25 3.0" 2.5" 3.25 3.13 10.25 — — 34.06 400 Amp Frame EBMBK K 41.50 42.65 12.00 17.65 20.28 10.92 (2)3" (2)2.5" 3.25 3.00 10.92 — — 29.23 600, 800 and 1000 Amp Frame† EBMBL L 53.25 51.50 53.28 12.00 17.90 20.58 13.03 (2)4" (2)3.5" 4.00 3.50 13.13 41.50 18.40 29.88 43.12 †1000 Ampere Frame (max. 800 ampere trip) ‡Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Breather and drain entries must be plugged for NEMA 4 rating. §Drilled & Tapped. CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 481 EPC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 3C Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Applications: EPC Circuit Breakers and Enclosures are used: • For service entrance*, feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting, heating, appliance and motor circuits • In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or combustible dusts • In damp, wet or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical or petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To provide disconnect means, short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection 3C Features: • Quick-opening covers – less than two turns to remove or install • Three section design for ease of installation • Water-shedding construction with female threads on top cover, male threads on bottom cover, and top cover skirted • Specially located stops and locks insure adequate thread engagement and prevent overtightening • Separate replaceable mounting bracket attached to the rear of the body provides three-point suspension for quick installation and leveling – one keyhole slot at top and two open slots at bottom • Bodies have two taper-tapped conduit hubs with integral bushings on the top, and two more directly below • Mounting plates are supplied with all necessary holes and hardware to attach any of the circuit breakers shown in the catalog listings. Breaker and interior mounting frames are easily removed as a unit, providing free access to the wiring chamber • Breaker is operated by an external handle which can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions by as many as three padlocks. Breaker is trip-free of the handle and will open under short circuit or overload, even if the handle is locked in the "ON" position Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA: 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG • UL Standard: 698 • CSA: C22.2 No. 30 Standard Materials: • • • • Bodies and covers – copper-free aluminum Operating handles – copper-free aluminum Operating shafts – stainless steel Interior parts – sheet steel Options: The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Auxiliary Switch‡ 1A/1B (1P2T).......................................................................... S784 2A/2B (2P2T).......................................................................... S785 Insulated neutral with 2 connectors (100, 150 and 225 amp.) S146 Grounded neutral stud with 3 connectors (100, 150 and 225 amp.)........................................................................................ S178 Side bosses drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs. S366 Back boss drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs... S367 Standard Breather (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III)........................................................................... S219 Standard Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III)............................................................................... S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III)......................................................... S198V Universal Breather-Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups F, G)............................................................................. S454§ (2) Universal Breather-Drains (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups F, G)............................................................................. S454V§ Electrical Rating Ranges: • 100, 150, 225, 250 ampere frame sizes Standard Finishes: • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural • Sheet steel – electrogalvanized CHS Controls AB *Suffix S146 insulated material must be used to comply with NEC requirements for service entrance. ‡Application is limited by circuit breaker design – Consult Factory. §Not suitable for NEMA 4. 482 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se EPC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 3C Dimensions In Inches* 3C Int. Dia. a b c d e f g h j k l m n p EPC377 7" EPC387 7"W EPC317 11" 105/8 1913/16 2313/16 143/8 63/4 711/16 53/8 2 2 73/8 21/16 93/8 51/4 11/4 1213/16 1913/16 2313/16 143/8 63/4 711/16 53/8 2 2 91/4 21/16 93/8 51/4 2 161/8 251/2 351/2 201/4 91/8 85/8 73/4 41/2 51/2 12 25/8 11 51/2 21/2 *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 483 3C EPC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 100/150A Frame, Thermal Magnetic, 120–240 VAC, 125–250 VDC Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Ordering Information: To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker where there is a choice of manufacturer, insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings. Non-Interchangeable Trip Circuit Breaker 3C Poles 2 3 Voltage Rating Enclosure Int. Dia. Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Cat. # EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC387 EPC387 ➀ 70EB 2 EPC387 ➀ 90EB 2 EPC387 ➀ 100EB 2 ➀15EB 2 ➀20EB 2 ➀30EB 2 ➀40EB 2 ➀50EB 2 ➀70EB 2 ➀90EB 2 ➀100EB 2 7 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 7W 2 70 90 100 7 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 7W 2 70 90 100 EPC387 EPC387 ➀ 70EB 3 EPC387 ➀ 90EB 3 EPC387 ➀ 100EB 3 240VAC or 125-250VDC 240VAC* ➀15EB 3 ➀20EB 3 ➀30EB 3 ➀40EB 3 ➀50EB 3 ➀70EB 3 ➀99EB 3 ➀100EB 3 *Square D 240VAC/125–250VDC ➀ Circuit Breakers Manufacturer Frame Symbol General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer TEB FAL ED TT DT WT CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 484 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EPC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG 100/150A Frame, Thermal Magnetic, 480–600 VAC, 250 VDC Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 3C Non-Interchangeable Trip Circuit Breaker Poles 2 Voltage Rating Int. Dia. With Circuit Bkr. Cat. # EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC387 EPC387 ➀70EHD 2 EPC387 ➀90EHD 2 EPC387 ➀100EHD 2 ➀15EHD 2 ➀20EHD 2 ➀30EHD 2 ➀40EHD 2 ➀50EHD 2 ➀70EHD 2 ➀90EHD 2 ➀100EHD 2 11/4 7W 2 70 90 100 7 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 7W 2 70 90 100 EPC387 EPC387 ➀70EHD 3 EPC387 ➀90EHD 3 EPC387 ➀100EHD 3 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 ➁15FDB 2 ➁20FDB 2 ➁30FDB 2 ➁40FDB 2 ➁50FDB 2 ➁70FDB 2 ➁90FDB 2 ➁100FDB 2 2 70 90 100 110* 125* 150* EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 ➁70FDB 2 ➁90FDB 2 ➁100FDB 2 ➁110FDB 2 ➁125FDB 2 ➁150FDB 2 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 ➁15FDB 3 ➁20FDB 3 ➁30FDB 3 ➁40FDB 3 ➁50FDB 3 ➁70FDB 3 ➁90FDB 3 ➁100FDB 3 2 70 90 100 100* 125* 150* EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 ➁70FDB 3 ➁90FDB 3 ➁100FDB 3 ➁110FDB 3 ➁125FDB 3 ➁150FDB 3 480VAC† 600VAC or 250VDC 7 600VAC§ 7W ➀ Circuit Breakers Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # 7 480VAC or 250VDC 7W 3 Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 7 2 Hub Size Frame Symbol TED FAL EHD TT DT WT ➁ Circuit Breakers Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer Frame Symbol TED FAL FD, FDB TT DT WT *Square D FAL Frame, 100A Max. † Square D 480VAC/250VDC § Square D 600VAC/250VDC www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 3C 3 Enclosure ➀15EHD 3 ➀20EHD 3 ➀30EHD 3 ➀40EHD 3 ➀50EHD 3 ➀70EHD 3 ➀90EHD 3 ➀100EHD 3 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 485 3C EPC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 225/250A Frame, Thermal Magnetic, 600 VAC, 250 VDC Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG Non-Interchangeable Trip Circuit Breaker Poles 2 Voltage Rating Int. Dia. 600VAC or 250VDC Hub Size 11 600VAC 11 ➀ Circuit Breakers Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D Frame Symbol JDB TFJ KAL WT TT DT Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 21/ 2 125 150 175 200 225 250* 21/ 2 125 150 175 200 225 250* 3C 3 Enclosure Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Cat. # EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 ➀125JB ➀150JB ➀175JB ➀200JB ➀225JB ➀250JB 2 2 2 2 2 2 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 ➀125JB ➀150JB ➀175JB ➀200JB ➀225JB ➀250JB 3 3 3 3 3 3 *General Electric TFJ Frame, 225A Max. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 486 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG 3C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Applications: 3C FLB circuit breakers and enclosures are used: • For service entrance, feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting, heating, appliance and motor circuits • In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or combustible dusts • In damp, wet or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To provide disconnect means, short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection Features: Options: • Semi-cylindrical body shape for maximum strength at lowest practical weight • Round threaded covers at each end, set at an angle to provide ready access to interior for ease of wiring • Breaker is operated by an external handle which can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions. Breaker is tripfree of the handle and will open under short circuit or overload even if the handle is locked in the "ON" position • Bodies have vertical through feed conduit hubs of sizes given in the listings Description Suffix 2 lugs for neutral connections (50, 100 and 225 amp.) ............................................... S146 Ground neutral stud with 3 connectors (50, 100 and 225 amp.) ................................. S168 Standard Breather (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III) ............ S219 Standard Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III) .................. S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III) ... S198V Universal Breather – Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups F, G) ................... S454* (2) Universal Breather – Drains (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups F, G) ............ S454V* Specify Auxiliary Switch‡ 1A/1B (1P2T) ........................................................................................................... S784 2A/2B (2P2T) ........................................................................................................... S785 The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Dimensions Certifications and Compliances: In Inches§: • NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG • UL Standard: 698 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Standard Materials: • Bodies, covers and operating handles – copper-free aluminum • Operating shafts – stainless steel • Interior parts – sheet steel Standard Finishes: • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural • Sheet steel – zinc electroplate with chromate finish Electrical Rating Ranges: • 100 and 225 ampere frame sizes Cat. # †FLB140, 220, 221 FLB115, 141, 147, 148, 171, 172, 173, 175, 222, 361, 116, 142, 149, 174, 177, 223, 362 FLB224, 225, 264, 265, 267, 346 a b 1 c d e f g 10 /4 6 /4 7 /4 7 7 5 /4 /16 11/8 71/2 133/8 81/2 93/4 91/8 7 /16 13/4 133/4 221/2 161/4 97/8 151/2 21 1 1 1 /32 27/16 *Not suitable for NEMA 4/EEMAC. †With two mounting feet, one at upper right and one at lower left. ‡Application is limited by circuit breaker design – Consult Factory. §Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com sUS: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 487 3C FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 100A Frame, Thermal Magnetic, 120 VAC/125 VDC, 240 VAC/250 VDC Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Ordering Information: To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker where there is a choice of manufacturer, insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings. 100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-Interchangeable Trip 240VAC Max. Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating 120VAC or 125VDC Hub Size 2 3 Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating With Circuit Bkr. General Electric "TEB" Cat. # Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # 3 /4 15 20 30 40 50 1 15 20 30 40 50 FLB221 FLB221 FLB221 FLB221 FLB221 FLB221 11/2 70 90 100 FLB223 FLB223 TT70 2 FLB223 TT90 2 FLB223 TT100 2 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB222 FLB222 FLB222 FLB222 FLB222 FLB222 11/2 70 90 100 FLB223 FLB223 TT70 3 FLB223 TT90 3 FLB223 TT100 3 3C 1 Enclosure 240VAC or 125–250VDC 240VAC FLB220 FLB220 FLB220 FLB220 FLB220 FLB220 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 1 1 1 1 1 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 2 2 2 2 2 CHS Controls AB TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 3 3 3 3 3 Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 488 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG 100A Frame, Thermal Magnetic, 120–480 VAC, 125–250 VDC 3C 100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-Interchangeable Trip 240VAC Max. Circuit Breaker Poles 1 2 Voltage Rating Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating Hub Size 120VAC or 125VDC With Circuit Bkr. Square D "FAL" Cat. # Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # 3 /4 15 20 30 40 50 1 15 20 30 40 50 FLB172 FLB172 FLB172 FLB172 FLB172 FLB172 11/ 2 70 90 100 FLB174 FLB174 DT70 2 FLB174 DT90 2 FLB174 DT100 2 11/ 4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB173 FLB173 FLB173 FLB173 FLB173 FLB173 11/ 2 70 90 100 FLB174 FLB174 DT70 3 FLB174 DT90 3 FLB174 DT100 3 240VAC or 125–250VDC 240VAC or 125–250VDC FLB171 FLB171 FLB171 FLB171 FLB171 FLB171 DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 1 1 1 1 1 DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 2 2 2 2 2 DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 3C 3 Enclosure 3 3 3 3 3 100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-Interchangeable Trip 480VAC Max. Circuit Breaker Poles 2 3 Voltage Rating Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Cutler-Hammer "EHD" Cat. # With Circuit Breaker General Electric "TED" Cat. # FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 1 15 20 30 40 50 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 11/ 2 70 90 100 FLB142 FLB142 WT70 2 FLB142 WT90 2 FLB142 WT100 2 FLB142 TT70 2 FLB142 TT90 2 FLB142 TT100 2 11/ 4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 11/ 2 70 90 100 FLB142 FLB142 WT70 3 FLB142 WT90 3 FLB142 WT100 3 480VAC or 250VDC 480VAC WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 FLB142 TT70 3 FLB142 TT90 3 FLB142 TT100 3 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 489 3C FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 100A Frame, Thermal Magnetic, 480 VAC, 250 VDC Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-Interchangeable Trip 480VAC Max. Circuit Breaker Poles 3C 2 3 Voltage Rating Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating With Circuit Bkr. Square D "FAL" Cat. # Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # 11/ 4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB147 FLB147 FLB147 FLB147 FLB147 FLB147 11/ 2 70 90 100 FLB149 FLB149 DT70 2 FLB149 DT90 2 FLB149 DT100 2 11/ 4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB148 FLB148 FLB148 FLB148 FLB148 FLB148 11/ 2 70 90 100 FLB149 FLB149 DT70 3 FLB149 DT90 3 FLB149 DT100 3 480VAC or 250VDC 480VAC or 250VDC CHS Controls AB DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 490 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 100A Frame, Thermal Magnetic, 600 VAC, 250 VDC Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 3C 100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-Interchangeable Trip 600VAC Max. Circuit Breaker Poles 2 3 2 3 FLB115 11/2 70 90 100 FLB116 FLB116 WT70 2 FLB116 WT90 2 FLB116 WT100 2 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 11/2 70 90 100 FLB116 FLB116 WT70 3 FLB116 WT90 3 FLB116 WT100 3 Voltage Rating WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. General Electric "TED" Cat. # 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB361 FLB361 FLB361 FLB361 FLB361 FLB361 11/2 70 90 100 FLB362 FLB362 TT70 3 FLB362 TT90 3 FLB362 TT100 3 WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 Enclosure Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating Hub Size 600VAC Circuit Breaker Poles 11/4 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 600VAC Voltage Rating With Circuit Bkr. Cutler-Hammer "FDB" Cat. # Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # 15 20 30 40 50 600VAC or 250VDC Circuit Breaker Poles Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating Hub Size 3C 3 Voltage Rating Enclosure TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 3 3 3 3 3 Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating With Circuit Bkr. Square D "FAL" Cat. # Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB175 FLB175 FLB175 FLB175 FLB175 FLB175 11/2 70 90 100 FLB177 FLB177 DT70 2 FLB177 DT90 2 FLB177 DT100 2 11/4 15 20 30 40 50 FLB175 FLB175 FLB175 FLB175 FLB175 FLB175 11/2 70 90 100 FLB177 FLB177 DT70 3 FLB177 DT90 3 FLB177 DT100 3 600VAC or 250VDC 600VAC or 250VDC DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 491 3C FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 225A Frame, Thermal Magnetic, 600 VAC, 250 VDC Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG 100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-Interchangeable Trip 600VAC Max. Circuit Breaker Poles 2 Voltage Rating 600VAC or 250VDC Enclosure Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating Hub Size 21/ 2 125 150 175 200 225 125 150 175 200 225 600VAC 21/ 2 Poles Voltage Rating Hub Size 3C 3 Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 2 600VAC or 250VDC 21/2 125 150 175 200 225 3 600VAC 2 /2 125 150 175 200 225 1 Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Cutler-Hammer "JDB"† Cat. # FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 2 2 2 2 2 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 3 3 3 3 3 Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. General Electric "TFJ" Cat. # FLB346 FLB224 or FLB346 FLB224 FLB224 FLB224 FLB224 FLB224 TT125 TT150 TT175 TT200 TT225 3 3 3 3 3 With Circuit Bkr. Square D "KAL" Cat. # FLB346 FLB346 FLB346 FLB346 FLB346 DT125 DT150 DT175 DT200 DT225 2 2 2 2 2 FLB346 FLB346 FLB346 FLB346 FLB346 DT125 DT150 DT175 DT200 DT225 3 3 3 3 3 100 Ampere Frame Size with Interchangeable Trip 600VAC Max. Circuit Breaker Poles 2 3 Voltage Rating 600VAC or 250VDC 600VAC Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 3 125 150 175 200 225 3 125 150 175 200 225 Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Cutler-Hammer "JD"* Cat. # FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 2 2 2 2 2 FLB267 or FLB225 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 3 3 3 3 3 With Circuit Bkr. General Electric "TFK" Cat. # FLB225 FLB225 FLB225 FLB225 FLB225 TT125 TT150 TT175 TT200 TT225 3 3 3 3 3 *Formerly "KB" †Formerly "JB" CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 492 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EFD and EFDC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 120VAC, Single Pole 3C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG, 12 Applications: EFD circuit breakers and enclosures are used: • For branch circuit protection for lighting, appliance, and motor circuits • In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or combustible dusts • In corrosive locations • For installation at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To provide disconnect means, short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection Features: Certifications and Compliances: • NEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG, 12 Standard Materials: • Bodies and covers – Feraloy® iron alloy • Operating handles – type 6 / 6 nylon • Operating shafts – stainless steel Standard Finishes: EFD dead end EFDC through feed 3C • Small, compact enclosures with accurately ground, wide flange on both body and cover for flametight joint • Dead-end (EFD) or through feed (EFDC) hubs 3/4" to 1" sizes • Breaker mounted on cover and back wired for ease of installation • Breaker can be padlocked in "ON" or "OFF" positions with trip-free handle mechanism Electrical Ratings: • Single pole – 120 / 240 VAC max. • Trip ratings – 15, 20 and 30 amp. Options: Description For use in Group B hazardous areas* Suffix GB Ordering Information With Square D Type "QOU" Circuit Breakers Hub Size in. 15 Amp Cat. # EFD Single Gang (Dead End) 3 /4 EFD21104 1 EFD31104 20 Amp Cat. # 30 Amp Cat. # EFD21105 EFD31105 EFD21106 EFD31106 EFDC Single Gang (Through Feed) /4 EFDC21104 EFDC21105 1 EFDC31104 EFDC31105 EFDC21106 EFDC31106 EFD Two Gang (Dead End) /4 EFD22104 1 EFD32104 EFD22106 EFD32106 3 • Feraloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Type 6 / 6 nylon – black • Stainless steel – natural 3 EFD22105 EFD32105 EFDC Two Gang (Through Feed) /4 EFDC22104 EFDC22105 1 EFDC32104 EFDC32105 3 EFDC22106 EFDC32106 Dimensions In Inches†: Hub Size 3 /4 1 Dim. "h" Dim. "l" /8 1 13 7 /16 /16 15 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se *Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening, for Group B use. †Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 493 3C NCB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 600VAC, 250VDC Heavy Duty Applications: 3C • NCB circuit breakers are for use in conjunction with a variety of heating, lighting and power circuits to provide disconnect means and short circuit protection. Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA: 3, 4X and 12 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 94 • UL Standard: 489 Features: Electrical Rating Ranges: • Enclosures are made of Krydon®, Cooper Crouse-Hinds' high impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat • Unitized, strong and durable enclosure construction provides longer service life for equipment • Enclosure has hinged access door which opens 160° for easy wiring and maintenance. Three screws for door frame are hidden behind access door • Access door may be padlocked to prevent unauthorized access • 100, 150, 225, 250 and 400 amp frames Options: Description Suffix • Insulated, groundable type terminal block for grounded or ungrounded neutral can be supplied • Hubs (see "Note on Hubs") – see page 646 • Grounding plate or bushing – see page 646 S618 Circuit breaker enclosure with built-in Kyrdon material handle Ordering Information To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker, insert the manufacturer’s symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings. Circuit Breaker Voltage Poles Rating Amps 100A Frame (Non-Interchangeable Trip) 15 20 25 30 35 40 240 VAC/ 2 50 250 VDC 60 70 80 90 100 2 Enclosure With Circuit Breaker Cat. # 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 480 VAC/ 250 VDC NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F ➀15EB 22 ➀20EB 22 ➀25EB 22 ➀30EB 22 ➀35EB 22 ➀40EB 22 ➀50EB 22 ➀60EB 22 ➀70EB 22 ➀80EB 22 ➀90EB 22 ➀100EB 22 NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F ➀15EHB 24 ➀20EHB 24 ➀25EHB 24 ➀30EHB 24 ➀35EHB 24 ➀40EHB 24 ➀50EHB 24 ➀60EHB 24 ➀70EHB 24 ➀80EHB 24 ➀90EHB 24 ➀100EHB 24 NCB1018F ➀Circuit Breakers: 600V 225/ 250A 600V Manufacturer General Electric Symbol 100/ 150A 240V 480V TT TEB TED† TED† TFJ Square D DT FAL† FAL† FAL† KAL WT EB EHB, EHD FB, FDB JB, JDB www.crouse-hinds.com Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 400A 600V Circuit Breaker Frame Ampere Rating Number Included Hub Size LAL EB, EHD*, FDB‡ EB, EHD*, FDB‡ JDB■ KDB§ 15–50 60–100 110–225 250–400 2 2 2 2 11/4 2 21/2 3 †Specify voltage. 494 CHS Controls AB NOTE ON HUBS: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when circuit breakers are ordered complete. If enclosures only are ordered, hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options") Frames Cutler-Hammer Without Circuit Breaker Cat. # US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 *Formerly EHB. ‡Formerly FB. §Formerly LB. ■Formerly JB. Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds NCB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures 600VAC, 250VDC Heavy Duty Circuit Breaker 3 3 3 240 VDC 480 VAC 600 VAC NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F ➀15EB 32 ➀20EB 32 ➀25EB 32 ➀30EB 32 ➀35EB 32 ➀40EB 32 ➀50EB 32 ➀70EB 32 ➀80EB 32 ➀90EB 32 ➀100EB 32 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 70 80 90 100 NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F ➀15EHB 34 ➀20EHB 34 ➀25EHB 34 ➀30EHB 34 ➀35EHB 34 ➀40EHB 34 ➀50EHB 34 ➀70EHB 34 ➀80EHB 34 ➀90EHB 34 ➀100EHB 34 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 70 80 90 100 NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F ➀15FB 36 ➀20FB 36 ➀25FB 36 ➀30FB 36 ➀35FB 36 ➀40FB 36 ➀50FB 36 ➀70FB 36 ➀80FB 36 ➀90FB 36 ➀100FB 36 NCB1018F Circuit Breaker Enclosure With Circuit Voltage Breaker Poles Rating Amps Cat. # 225/50A Frame (Non-Interchangeable Trip)§ 110 NCB1024F ➀110JB 125 NCB1024F ➀125JB 600 150 NCB1024F ➀150JB VAC/ 2 175 NCB1024F ➀175JB 250 200 NCB1024F ➀200JB VDC 225 NCB1024F ➀225JB 26 26 26 26 26 26 NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F ➀110JB ➀125JB ➀150JB ➀175JB ➀200JB ➀225JB 36 36 36 36 36 36 NCB1024F 400A Frame (Interchangeable Trip)* 250 NCB1426F 300 NCB1426F 600 VAC/ 2 350 NCB1426F 250 VDC 400 NCB1426F ➀250LB ➀300LB ➀350LB ➀400LB 26 26 26 26 NCB1426F ➀250LB ➀300LB ➀350LB ➀400LB 36 36 36 36 NCB1426F 3 3 110 125 150 175 200 225 600 VDC 250 300 350 400 600 VAC NCB1426F NCB1426F NCB1426F NCB1426F Without Circuit Breaker Cat. # 3C Enclosure With Without Circuit Circuit Voltage Breaker Breaker Poles Rating Amps Cat. # Cat. # 100/150A Frame (Non-Interchangeable Trip) – continued 15 NCB1018F ➀15FB 26 20 NCB1018F ➀20FB 26 25 NCB1018F ➀25FB 26 30 NCB1018F ➀30FB 26 35 NCB1018F ➀35FB 26 600 VAC/ 40 NCB1018F ➀40FB 26 2‡ NCB1018F 250 VDC 50 NCB1018F ➀50FB 26 70 NCB1018F ➀70FB 26 80 NCB1018F ➀80FB 26 90 NCB1018F ➀90FB 26 100 NCB1018F ➀100FB 26 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 70 80 90 100 3C Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 ➀Circuit Breakers: NCB1018F Manufacturer General Electric Symbol Frames 100/ 150A 240V 480V TT TEB Square D DT FAL† FAL† FAL† KAL EB EHB, EHD FB, FDB JB, JDB Cutler-Hammer WT TED† 600V 225/ 250A 600V TED† TFJ 400A 600V LAL Note on Hubs: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when circuit breakers are ordered complete. If enclosures only are ordered, hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options"). NCB1018F Circuit Breaker Frame Ampere Rating Number Included Hub Size EB, EHD✪, FDB▲ EB, EHD✪, FDB▲ JDB■ ■Formerly JB ✪Formerly EHB ▲Formerly FB 15–50 60–100 110–225 2 2 2 11/4 2 21/2 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se †Specify voltage. ‡2-pole, 600 VAC/250 VDC for Square D circuit breakers only. *For Square D circuit breakers only. §Also available with interchangeable trip breakers. Specify on order. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 495 3C NCB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 600VAC, 250VDC Heavy Duty Dimensions 3C In Inches* Outside Dimensions Cat. # l NCB1018 19 /32 NCB1024 NCB1426 25 /32 2713/32 Mounting Dimensions Door Opening Dimensions d mw ml dl 11 /32 8 /32 7 /8 11 /32 1513/32 8 /32 923/32 7 /8 117/8 w 13 13 13 23 13 23 7 7 dw 19 /8 7 16 /8 511/16 25 /8 271/4 22 /8 2311/16 511/16 911/16 3 3 7 *Dimensions are approximate, not to be used for construction purposes. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 496 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 4C Control Stations Hazardous and Non-hazardous Description Page No. Application/Selection see pages 498–499 EDS / EFS Series Control Stations see see see see page page page page 500 505 507 510 see page 513 see pages 516–517 see page 518 see page 519 see page 520 see page 521 see pages 522–523 see page 524 see page 525 MC / MCC Pushbutton, Selector Switch, and Pilot Light Stations see page 527 N2S / N2SC Control Stations see page 530 N2SU / N2SCU Control Stations see page 537 N2FA / N2FAC Fire Alarm Control Stations see page 541 GHG43 Control Stations see page 542 OAC Pushbutton Stations and Selector Switches see page 553 Control Station Covers see page 556 Replacements for Pushbutton and Selector Switch Control Stations see page 557 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 497 4C FlexStation™ Control Station Components EDSCM Modular Series Bodies DSD Cover and Device Sub-assemblies DSD-SR HP Rated Selector Switch Fully Assembled EDS and EFS Control Stations EDS Pushbutton Stations EFS Pilot Light Stations EDS Combination Pushbutton and Pilot Light Stations EDS Selector Switches EFS Selector Switches EDS Snap Switches EDS Manual Motor Starting Switches EFS Fire Alarm Station EDS / EFS Control Stations Sub-assembly Reference Guide 4C Control Stations Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart Applications: 4C Control stations are used as a remote means of: • Motor control • Visual indication of equipment performance • On-off control of circuits • Circuit selection Options: Considerations for Selection: • The environment of the control station location and requirements for construction in terms of NEC/CEC compliances and NEMA/EEMAC type • Function to be performed • Desirability of factory sealing as compared to field sealing • Factory sealing has distinct advantages: Less installation problems Less time consuming Less change of error Lower installed cost Accommodates future changes to circuitry Greater reliability • The number of controls required, and the space available for installation. Where space is limited, panel or junction box mounting with many combinations are available • See "Quick Selector Chart" for guidance Many options are available on: • Material and finishes where special atmospheric conditions prevail • Special features for specific applications. See individual control station listings for available options Quick Selector Chart Control Station MC, MCC NEC/CEC – Hazardous Area Compliance NEMA/EEMAC Type 3, 4 EDS, EDSC§ Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III 3, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch§ DSD Covers and Device Sub-assemblies Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III 3, 7B, 9EFG Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch DSD-SR Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III 3, 5, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 EDSCM Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III EFS§ Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III No. of Devices or Units 1-5* Type of Mounting Surface 1-5 gang Cover Style Gasketed 1-2* Surface 1-2 gang Ground joint 1 Surface 1 gang Ground joint Selector Switch 1 Surface 1 gang Ground joint 3, 7CD, 9EFG Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch 1-15* Surface 1-15 gang Ground joint 3, 7BCD, 9EFG Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch 1-2* Surface 1 gang Ground joint Function Pushbutton Pilot light Selector switch Factory Sealed Pilot light§ Pushbutton Selector switch *Number of devices per unit. §Factory-sealed units. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 498 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Control Stations 4C Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart Quick Selector Chart (continued) Control NEC/CEC – Hazardous Area Station Compliances FlexStation Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC Type 3, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG Function Pilot light Pushbutton Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D 4X, IP66 Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, (A)Ex de IIB + H2, T6 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G PTB ATEX Certified 3117 CENELEC EEx de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2 Eex de IIC, T6 Zones 21 and 22 Pushbutton Signal Lamp Potentiometer Ammeter Selector Switch Terminal Blocks N2FA, N2FAC Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D 3, 7BCD, 12 Fire Alarm N2S, N2SC N2SU, N2SCU Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D 3, 4X, 7BCD, 12 OAC Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III 3, 7ABCD, 9EFG, 12 No. of Devices Type of Cover or Units Mounting Style 1-2-3 Surface Ground joint 1-2 gang 1-4* Surface 1 gang Screw and Gasket Pushbutton Selector switch 1 Surface 1 gang Screw and Gasket Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Combination Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Combination 1-4* Surface 1 gang Screw and Gasket Pushbutton Selector switch Pushbutton Selector switch 1-2* Surface 1 gang Threaded *Number of devices per unit. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 499 4C GHG43 Factory Sealed Pilot light Pushbutton 4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations FlexStation™ Control Station Components Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B (Div. 2 only) C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Cl. III Zone 1 & 2 Groups IIB NEMA 3R, 7B* (Div. 2) CD, 9 EFG, 12 4C Applications: Five modular components – operators, contact blocks, covers, legend plates, and bodies – are combined to provide a variety of control stations which are: • For use indoors or outdoors, in areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable gases and vapors, or combustible dust. • Used in conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors and other electrical apparatus. • For installation in petroleum refineries, chemical, petrochemical, and other industrial process facilities; grain processing and storage facilities; and other heavy industrial applications where Class I, Class II, or Class III hazards are present. Features: • Momentary contact pushbuttons, maintained contact pushbuttons, and pilots lights offer a choice of functions. • Selector switches in 2 or 3 position configurations including keyed and spring return options. • Single-hole, two-hole, and three-hole covers for one, two, or three devices respectively per station. • Rugged control devices for safe, reliable operation in industrial applications. • Bodies, with extra room for wire pulling and termination, also include two integral mounting feet for fast, secure installation. • Bodies have 1/2", 3/4", or 1" dead-end or through-feed conduit hubs with integral bushing for protection of wire insulation. • Covers and bodies are available in Feraloy® or copper-free aluminum for light weight and corrosion resistance. • DL legend plates have large lettering to give clear indication of device function. Space is available for field markings. Standard Materials: Options: • Bodies, covers – Feraloy® or copper-free aluminum. • Pushbuttons and guards – Type 6 / 6 nylon. • Operating shafts, bearings – stainless steel. Description Suffix Copper-free aluminum bodies and covers SA Corro-free™ epoxy finish for use in severely corrosive environments. FlexStation covers and bodies. S752 Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint. • Copper-free aluminum – natural. • Stainless steel – natural. ® Electrical Ratings: • Pushbuttons and selector switches – 600 VAC heavy duty (NEMA A600). • Pilot lights – 120 VAC. Dimensions In Inches: Certifications and Compliances: • NEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B* (Div. 2), C, D Class II, Division 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Class III • Zone 1 & 2 Groups IIB* • NEMA: 3R, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG, 12 • UL Standard: 1203 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 500 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 †Covers have same length and width as back boxes. *For Class I, Division 1, Group B or Zone 1 Hydrogen applications, use the EFS(C) complete control station catalog numbers see page 514. CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDS / EFS Series Control Stations 4C Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B (Div. 2 only) C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Cl. III Zone 1 & 2 Groups IIB NEMA 3R, 7B* (Div. 2) CD, 9 EFG, 12 FlexStation™ Control Station Components STEP 1 – Select Operator Pushbutton – front operated, standard black button Description Cat. # Single button for 1 contact block Single button for 2 contact blocks Double buttons for 2 contact blocks DEV11 DEV12 DEV22 Options Suffix CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Pilot Light – factory sealed, incandescent lamp Description Pilot Pilot Pilot Pilot Pilot light light light light light with with with with with Cat. # red jewel green jewel amber jewel clear jewel blue LED and clear jewel DEV30 DEV30 DEV30 DEV30 DEV30 Options Suffix LED lamps (standard clear jewel with colored lamp) 24 V lamp (not available with transformer feature) 240 / 120 V pilot light transformer 480 / 120 V pilot light transformer 600 / 120 V pilot light transformer LED S300 T2 T4 T5 J1 J3 J6 J10 J11 LED Selector Switch – with standard lockout Description Cat. # 2-position (pos. 1 – N.O., pos. 2 – N.C.) for use with 1 or 2 contact blocks 3-position (pos. 1 – N.O., pos. 2 – Open, pos. 3 – N.C.) for use with 1 or 2 contact blocks 3-position (pos. 1 – N.C., pos. 2 – N.O., pos. 3 – N.O. for Switch A) (pos. 1 – N.O., pos. 2 – N.O., pos. 3 – N.C. for Switch B) for use with 2 contact blocks DEV42 DEV43 Options Suffix Spring return to center from right (For DEV43 or DEV44 only) Spring return to center from left (For DEV43 or DEV44 only) Spring return to center from right and left (For DEV43 or DEV44 only) Key Operated – removable from all positions Key Operated – removable from left position for DEV42 or from center for DEV43 and DEV44 Key Operated – removable from right position for DEV42 or from left for DEV43 and DEV44 Key Operated – removable from right position for DEV43 and DEV44 S634 S635 S842 S847 S847 S847 S847 DEV44 K1 K2 K3 K4 STEP 2 – Select Contact Block (if required). For product details see page 557. Contact Block Description Cat. # Contact block, 1 NO and 1 NC, 10A, 600VAC, A600 rating ESWP126 For additional technical information see page 557. Note - Each control station will accept a maximum of three contact blocks. Select device operators accordingly. DEV12, DEV22 and DEV44 may not be used on a three-operator (DS443-SA) cover. DEV42 and DEV43 may not be used on a three-operator cover when using them with two contact blocks. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 501 4C Specify color for each pushbutton button (ex: DEV11G, DEV22GR). Color is black if unspecified. Green button - unmarked G Red button - unmarked (includes lockout with bar and chain) R Momentary red mushroom head style (not available with lockout or with DEV22) S111 Lockout with bar and chain (available on DEV11 and DEV12) S153 Maintained red mushroom head style (lockout comes standard, do not specify S153; not available S769 on DEV22) 4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations FlexStation™ Control Station Components Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B (Div. 2 only) C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Cl. III Zone 1 & 2 Groups IIB NEMA 3R, 7B* (Div. 2) CD, 9 EFG, 12 4C STEP 3 – Select Desired Legend Plates For use with single hole covers For use with 2 or 3 hole covers Cat. # Inscription Cat. # Inscription Cat. # Inscription DL101 DL128 DL129 DL130 DL132 DL133 DL135 DL136 DL137 DL138 DL139 DL140 DL141 DL142 DL143 DL144 DL148 DL149 DL165 DL186 DL187 DL188 DL189 DL190 DL191 DL192 DL193 DL194 DL195 DL196 DL197 DL198 DL199 Blank Run-Jog Hand-Auto Forward-Reverse Open-Close Up-Down In-Out Raise-Lower Start-Stop Run-Off-Jog Hand-Off-Auto For-Off-Rev Fast-Off-Slow 1-Off-2 Open-Off-Close Up-Off-Down Off-On Auto-Off-Hand Slow-Fast Safe-Run Raise-Off-Lower Slow-Off-Fast Odd-Off-Even Stop-Start On-Off Fast-Slow Local-Remote Trip-Reset Auto-Manual Start-Emer Stop Alarm-Silence Maint-Manual Test-Reset DL01 DL02 DL03 DL05 DL06 DL07 DL08 DL09 DL10 DL11 DL12 DL13 DL14 DL15 DL16 DL17 DL18 DL19 DL20 DL21 DL22 DL23 DL24 DL25 DL26 DL27 DL28 DL29 DL30 Blank w/no fields Blank w/single field Blank w/2 fields Start Stop On Off Run Jog Trip Reset Test Power On Hand Automatic Emer Stop Forward Reverse Open Close Up Down In Out Raise Lower Run-Jog Hand-Auto Forward-Reverse DL32 DL33 DL35 DL36 DL37 DL38 DL39 DL40 DL41 DL42 DL43 DL44 DL46 DL47 DL48 DL49 DL65 DL85 DL86 DL87 DL88 DL89 DL90 DL91 DL92 DL93 DL94 DL95 DL96 DL97 DL98 DL99 Open-Close Up-Down In-Out Raise-Lower Start-Stop Run-Off-Jog Hand-Off-Auto For-Off-Rev Fast-Off-Slow 1-Off-2 Open-Off-Close Up-Off-Down Fast Slow Off-On Auto-Off-Hand Slow-Fast Safe Safe-Run Raise-Off-Lower Slow-Off-Fast Odd-Off-Even Stop-Start On-Off Fast-Slow Local-Remote Trip-Reset Auto-Manual Start-Emer Stop Alarm-Silence Maint-Manual Test-Reset Note: For special markings order DL101-"desired markings" or DL01-"desired markings" STEP 4 – Select Cover Covers Description Cat. # Blank cover with single hole (Single gang) Blank cover with 2 holes (Single gang) Blank cover with 3 holes (To be used with EFD(C)1491-SA, 2491-SA or 3491-SA series of back boxes) Replacement cover plug for unused device operator openings DS441 DS442 DS443 SA 206765 Options: Suffix Aluminum body (mandatory suffix on DS443 must be included in catalog number) Exterior epoxy powder coat finish Interior & exterior epoxy powder coat finish. Not available on three operator cover (DS443-SA) SA S752 S753 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 502 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDS / EFS Series Control Stations FlexStation™ Control Station Components Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B (Div. 2 only) C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Cl. III Zone 1 & 2 Groups IIB NEMA 3R, 7B* (Div. 2) CD, 9 EFG, 12 4C STEP 5 – Select Back Box Back Boxes - for use with DS441 and DS442 covers or with 1 gang and 2 gang DS/DSD Series covers Dead End Through Feed Hub Size Back Box Arrangement EDS171 EDS271 EDS371 EDS172 EDS272 EDS372 EDSC171 EDSC271 EDSC371 EDSC172 EDSC272 EDSC372 /2" 3 /4" 1" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" Single gang back box Single gang back box Single gang back box Double gang back box Double gang back box Double gang back box 1 Suffix Aluminum body Exterior epoxy powder coat finish Interior & exterior epoxy powder coat finish SA S752 S753 4C Options: Back Boxes – for use with DS443-SA cover or with 11/2 gang DS511 (3-operator) Series covers Dead End Through Feed Hub Size Back Box Arrangement EFD1491 SA EFD2491 SA EFD3491 SA EFDC1491 SA EFDC2491 SA EFDC3491 SA 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/2 gang back box 11/2 gang back box 11/2 gang back box Options Suffix Exterior epoxy powder coat finish Interior & exterior epoxy powder coat finish S752 S753 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 503 4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B (Div. 2 only) C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Cl. III Zone 1 & 2 Groups IIB NEMA 3R, 7B* (Div. 2) CD, 9 EFG, 12 FlexStation™ Control Station Components Back Boxes – for use with DS441 and DS442 covers Through Feed Hub Size Back Box Arrangement EDSC378 1" 3 gang tandem Common Cover Assemblies Description With one pilot light With one pilot light and transformer With two pilot lights With one pushbutton With two pushbuttons With one pushbutton and one pilot light 4C Cat. # DS455 ➀ DS476 ➀ ➁ DS456 ➀ ➀ DS429§ DS454§ DS510 ➀§ ➀Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. Color Symbol Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green J6 J10 Blue J11 J1 J3 Amber Clear ➁Add suffix below for transformer primary voltage: Transformers – Voltages above 125 Nom. Volts 50–60Hz Transformer Primary Voltage Range Suffix 220 / 110 440 / 110 550 / 110 220–240 440–480 550–600 T2 T4 T5 § If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET START RUN TRIP STOP JOG TEST ON OPEN DOWN EMERGENCY CLOSE IN FORWARD UP OUT REVERSE LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC RAISE LOWER CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 504 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D* Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG EDS / EFS Series Control Stations EDSCM Modular Multi-Gang Control Device Bodies Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C For use with DSD device cover sub-assemblies see page 507. Applications: 4C Modular control device bodies are for surface mounting combinations of control device equipment for use in: • Industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas where atmospheres may contain hazardous gases or dusts, and arcing of enclosed devices must not ignite the surrounding atmosphere. • Conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control and monitoring motors. • Manual starting and stopping of small AC or DC motors. • Controlling and supplying energy to portable electrical devices such as motor generator sets, compressors, conveyors, portable tools, etc. Features: EDSCM Modular Control Stations have many distinct advantages over multiple individual units: • Reduce installation costs. A multi-gang device assembly can be installed in less time than several single-gang units. • Seals not required between gangs. • Improved appearance. No exposed conduit runs between devices. • Lightweight. Fifteen-gang aluminum device body can be installed by one person. • Mounting feet are provided on the top and bottom of every gang to facilitate installation. • Two and three gang tandem bodies have 11/4" through feed inward horizontal hubs and 1" or 2" vertical through feed hubs. Pipe plugs are installed in one horizontal hub and both vertical hubs. • Single-gang device bodies have 1" through feed inward horizontal hubs and 3/4" through feed vertical hubs. Pipe plugs are installed in one horizontal hub and both vertical hubs. • All hubs are taper tapped and have integral bushings. • Close nipples, which are used to join two or more device bodies together, are furnished with EDSCM 21, 32, 33, 62 and 63 units. • Any combination of bodies can be joined together horizontally. Ordering Information Certifications and Compliances: (When used with DSD device sub-assemblies)*: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class I, Division 2, Group B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B (Div.2) CD, 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Standard Materials: EDSCM21 EDSCM32† EDSCM62† EDSCM33‡ EDSCM63‡ Description Single Gang Tandem Two Gang Tandem Two Gang Tandem Three Gang Tandem Three Gang Through Feed Hub Size Cat. # /4" 1" 2" 1" 2" EDSCM21 EDSCM32 EDSCM62 EDSCM33 EDSCM63 3 * When a CPS receptacle cover device is used, the assembly meets requirements for Class I, Groups C and D areas only. † EDSCM32 and EDSCM62 will not accept covers with S697 or S701 suffixes. ‡ Bottom gang opening will accept covers with S697 or S701 suffixes. • Copper-free aluminum In Class I areas all conduit runs entering bodies must be sealed. As many as five bodies can be joined horizontally without an intervening seal. Finish: • Natural CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 505 EDS / EFS Series Control Stations 4C EDSCM Modular Multi-Gang Control Device Bodies Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D* Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Dimensions 4C In Inches: EDSCM21 EDSCM32 EDSCM62 EDSCM33 EDSCM63 * When a CPS receptacle cover device is used, the assembly meets requirements for Class I, Groups C and D areas only. Dimensions are approximate. Not for construction purposes. 506 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. I. Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D† Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG DSD Cover and Device Sub-assemblies For use with EDSCM modular control device bodies see page 505 and EDS/EDSC back boxes. • Feraloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural Certifications and Compliances: (When used with EDSCM & EDS bodies): • NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D† Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG • UL Standards: 894, 698 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Pushbuttons, Pilot Lights & Selector Switches (when used with EFS bodies): • NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7BCD, 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Options: The following special options are available by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix • Lockout provision on front operated pushbutton cover (standard on buttons marked "STOP" and "OFF")....................................................................................... S153 • Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counter-clockwise operation....................................................................... S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation.................................................................. S635 • Emergency "STOP" button momentary – front operated mushroom button breaks normally closed contacts (DL02 legend plate included - must specify legend text) S111 • Bodies and covers – copper-free aluminum.............................................................. SA • For 24 VDC operation on pilot lights......................................................................... S300 • Maintained contact mushroom head with lockout and guard (Will not fit with a pilot light if transformer is required)........................................................................... S769 • Spring return to center from right and left (For DEV43 or DEV44 only).................... S842 • Key Operated – removable from all positions........................................................... S847 K1 • Key Operated – removable from left position for DEV42 or from center for DEV43 and DEV44................................................................................................................. S847 K2 • Key Operated – removable from right position for DEV42 or from left for DEV43 and DEV44................................................................................................................. S847 K3 • Key Operated – removable from right position for DEV43 and DEV44..................... S847 K4 Ordering Information Manual Motor Starters Poles Max. H.P. Max. Volts A.C. With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches 1 1 115–230 2 1 115–230 DSD910 ➀ DSD911 ➀ With General Electric Switches 1 1 2 1 115–230 115–230 DSD912 ➀§ DSD913 ➀§ With Cutler-Hammer Switches 1 1 2 1 115–230 115–230 DSD914 ➀§ DSD915 ➀§ With Arrow-Hart Switches Without Overload Protection 2 5 2 7.5 3 7.5 3 15 250 600 250 600 DSD916 DSD916 DSD917 DSD917 (30A) (30A) (30A) (20A) Cat. # † When a CPS receptacle cover device is used, the assembly meets requirements for Class I, Groups C and D areas only. * For pushbuttons, pilot lights, & selector switches, use EFS back box with required external conduit seal for 1 inch hub size, within 5 feet for Class I, Division 1, Group B applications. § A comparable factory sealed cover will fit on the EDSCM21 body, EDS and EDSC bodies and in bottom gang of EDSCM33 and EDSCM63 bodies. To order, add suffix S701 to catalog number. ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater. To select heater see pages 463–464. Symbol 0 (zero) may be used to indicate heater omitted. CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 507 4C • Large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies • Lockout hole for padlock having 1/4" hasp is provided when used with covers for front lever and side rocker type operation • Lockout provisions on front operated pushbutton (marked "STOP" and "OFF") and all selector switch covers • For covers with front lever and side rocker type operating handles, threaded type shafts and bushings are used to ensure flametightness • Accurately ground flange for flametight joint when mated with ground flange on back box • Covers, front operated – Feraloy iron alloy and copper-free aluminum • Covers, side operated – copper-free aluminum • Shafts and shaft bushings – stainless steel • Rocker handles, pushbuttons and guards – type 6 / 6 nylon • Sealing enclosures – copper-free aluminum CPS delayed action receptacle cover: • Receptacle housing – copper-free aluminum • Insulation – diallyl phthalate (DAP) • Contacts – brass 4C Standard Finishes: Features: Standard Materials: Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. I. Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D† Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG DSD Cover and Device Sub-Assemblies DSD918 DSD922 DSD933 DSD962 DSD970 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations CPS152R ENR5201 For use with EDSCM modular control device bodies see page 505 & EFS/EDS back boxes. 4C Ordering Information Front Operated Pushbutton Stations Delayed Action Receptacles 600 VAC Heavy Duty, Factory Sealed Factory Sealed Number of Normal Cover Buttons Position Diagram Cat. # Rating Cat. # 20 A, 1 HP, 125–250 VAC 60 Hertz 20 A, 18 VDC CPS152R (2 wire, 3 pole) CPS532R (2 wire, 3 pole) CPS732R (3 wire, 4 pole) 1 1 Circuit Universal 1 2 Circuits Universal DSD919 ➀ 30 A, 11/2 HP, 125–250 VAC 60 Hertz; 7 A, 1/2 HP, 480 VAC, 60 Hertz 2 Circuits DSD920 ➀■ 30 A, 3 HP, 125–250 VAC 60 Hertz; 7A, 1 HP, 480 VAC, 60 Hertz 2 2 Circuits Universal DSD921 ➀ 2 2 Circuits Start-Stop unless otherwise specified DSD922 ➀■ 2 2 Circuits Universal Mushroom Head DSD970 ➀ 20 A, 250 VAC 3 (2-operator) 3 Circuits Universal DSD962 ➀ 3 (3-operator) 3 Circuits Universal DS511 ➀ SA§ 3 (3-operator) 3 Circuits Universal Double pilot light single pushbutton combo DS513 ➀ SA§ ➀If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET LIGHT ON START RUN TRIP HAND STOP JOG TEST AUTOMATIC ON OPEN DOWN RAISE EMERGENCY CLOSE IN LOWER FORWARD UP OUT REVERSE 3 (3-operator) 3 Circuits Universal Double pushbutton - single pilot light combo DS514 ➀ SA§ DSD918 ➀ Factory Sealed Rating Cat. # 20 A, 125 VAC ENR5201 Diagram 5-20R Style Amperes 120 VAC 277 VAC Cat. # 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 3-Way 4-Way 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Way 20 20 ▲ 20 20 30 30 30 20 20 ▲ 20 20 30 30 30 DSD933‡ DSD934‡ DSD935✪ DSD936‡ DSD937‡ DSD939✪ DSD940✪ DSD941✪ www.crouse-hinds.com ENR6202 6-20R Front Operated General Use Snap Switch 508 General Purpose, Dead Front US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 * For pushbuttons, pilot lights, & selector switches, use EFS back box with required external conduit seal for 1 inch hub size, within 5 feet for Class I, Division 1, Group B applications. † When a CPS receptacle cover device is used, the assembly meets requirements for Class I, Groups C and D areas only. ■ Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits with one normally open and one normally closed. 1 green button, 1 red button, and lockout provision provided as standard. ▲16 Amp., 125V. 10 Amp., 250V. ‡ To order a comparable factory sealed cover for EDS, EDSC, EDSCM21 and the bottom gang of EDSCM33 and EDSCM63 bodies, add suffix S697. ✪ Cannot be factory sealed. § Can only be used with EFD Series 11/ 2 gang back boxes. Pushbuttons include contact blocks. Standard pushbutton color is black. For optional colors - red, green - write in color. Example: DS511 GREEN BLACK RED-SA. First color is for uppermost button. For optional legend markings write in marking after device operator color. Example: DS513-J3 JOG-J1 STOP GREEN-SA. CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. I. Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG DSD Cover and Device Sub-Assemblies 4C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Pilot Light Devices‡ Factory Sealed Description Diagram Cat. # DSD948 ➀ With two pilot lights (Not available with a transformer) DSD947 ➀ With one pilot light and transformer DSD948 ➀ ➁ With one pilot light and pushbutton station DSD958 ➀ With one pilot light and 1 double pushbutton station DSD961 ➀ With one pilot light & transformer and 1 double pushbutton station DSD961 ➀ ➁ DSD958 DSD957 DSD961-J1 For use with EDSCM modular control device bodies see page 505 & EFS/EDS back boxes. Triple pilot light DS512 ➀ SA§ Double pilot light - single pushbutton combo DS513 ➀ SA§ Ordering Information Side Operated Pushbutton Station Double pushbutton - single pilot light combo DS514 ➀ SA§ 600 VAC Heavy Duty, Factory Sealed Blank Cover DSD951 DSD925 Diagram Cat. # Description Cat. # DSD957 1 Circuit Universal DSD949 ➂ Blank Cover 2 Circuits Universal DSD950 ➂ ➀Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. Color Symbol Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green 2 Circuits 1 Open - A 1 Closed - B Start-Stop unless otherwise specified DSD951 ➂ Maintained Contact 600 VAC Heavy Duty, Factory Sealed Two Position Amber Clear J6 J10 Blue J11 ➁Add suffix below for transformer primary voltage: Transformers – Voltages above 125 Selector Switches Style J1 J3 Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Cat. # Two Circuit DSD923 ➃ Four Circuit DSD924 ➃ DSD925 ➃ Two Circuit DSD926 ➃ Three Position Four Circuit DSD927 ➃ * For pushbuttons, pilot lights, & selector switches, use EFS back box with required external conduit seal for 1 inch hub size, within 5 feet for Class I, Division 1, Group B applications. ‡LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED to Cat. No. after last color symbol. Nom. Volts 50–60Hz Transformer Primary Voltage Range Suffix 220 / 110 440 / 110 550 / 110 220–240 440–480 550–600 T2 T4 T5 ➂ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET LIGHT ON START RUN TRIP HAND STOP JOG TEST AUTOMATIC ON OPEN DOWN RAISE EMERGENCY CLOSE IN LOWER FORWARD UP OUT REVERSE ➃ Specify indicating plate markings. Standard indicating plate markings available are as follows: Two-Position FAST, SLOW IN, OUT RUN, JOG OPEN, CLOSE RAISE, LOWER HAND, AUTOMATIC UP, DOWN START, STOP FORWARD, REVERSE ON, OFF Three-Position JOG, OFF, RUN 1, OFF, 2 AUTOMATIC, OFF, HAND OPEN, OFF, CLOSE FORWARD, OFF, REVERSE UP, OFF, DOWN FAST, OFF, SLOW CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 509 4C Normal Position DSD947-J1-J1 4C With one pilot light EDS / EFS Series Control Stations 4C DSD-SR Series Horsepower Rated Selector Switch 30 A, 600 V; Front Operated Cl. I, Groups C & D Cl. II, Groups E, F & G Cl. III Enclosure 3, 5 & 12 Ordering Information Switch Function Cat. # Number of Poles Number of Positions ON/OFF DSD DSD DSD DSD DSD DSD SR30120 SR30220 SR30320 SR30420 SR30520 SR30620 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 DSD SR30121 DSD SR30221 DSD SR30321 1 2 3 2 2 2 DOUBLE-THROW without OFF Connecting Diagram 1-6 Pole 4C 1-3 Pole DOUBLE-THROW without OFF with electrically isolated contacts DOUBLE-THROW with OFF DSD SR30123 DSD SR30223 DSD SR30323 1 2 3 2 2 2 1-3 Pole DSD SR30132 DSD SR30232 DSD SR30332 1 2 3 3 3 3 1-3 Pole DOUBLE-THROW with OFF and electrically isolated contacts DSD SR30134 DSD SR30234 DSD SR30334 1 2 3 3 3 3 1-3 Pole Electrical Specification Horsepower Rating Voltage 3PH 1PH 120 3 1.5 240 7.5 3 480 10 5 600 10 5 Maximum Current: 30 A Heavy-duty A600 rating Options: Description Lockout for 2 position switch, handle in either position Suffix SX178 Lockout for 3 position switch, handle in either position S349 DSD-SR cover assembly shown mounted to an EDS back box CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 510 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EFS and EDS Factory Sealed Devices Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Applications: Certifications and Compliances: Factory sealed enclosures are installed in a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled and are used: • To prevent arcing of enclosed device from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere or atmospheres external to the enclosure • In industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas, or metal handling or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust • In non-hazardous areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors Manual motor starting switch enclosures are used: • For manual starting of small AC or DC motors • To provide manual starting and stopping and, in the case of units with heaters, motor running protection • NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Factory sealed devices have many distinct advantages: • Reduce installation problems • Eliminate external seals • Lower installation costs • Improve safety • Are used with general purpose snap and pushbutton type switches • Standard neoprene covers for front operated pushbuttons. Prevents accumulation of dirt and entrance of water around operating shafts • Mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings • Large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies • Lockout provisions on front operated pushbutton (marked "STOP" and "OFF") and selector switch covers • Lockout hole for padlock having 1/4" hasp is provided when used with covers for front lever and side rocker type operation • Close tolerances in machining of wide, mating flanges and journalled shafts and bearings for front button operation, produces flametightness of enclosure joints • On enclosures with front lever and side rocker type operating handles, threaded type shafts and bushings are used to ensure flametightness • Dead end (EFS or EDS) or through feed (EFSC or EDSC) hubs – 1/2" to 1" sizes Standard Materials: • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy; copper-free aluminum • Front operated pushbutton and pilot light covers – Feraloy iron alloy • Side operated type pushbutton covers – copper-free aluminum • Shafts – stainless steel • Shaft bushings – stainless steel • Rocker handle and pushbutton guards – type 6 / 6 nylon • Sealing enclosures – copper-free aluminum 4C Features: 4C Standard Finishes: • • • • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum – natural Type 6 / 6 nylon – black Stainless steel – natural Options: The following special options are available from the factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix • Emergency "Stop" button (momentary) – front operated red mushroom button..................................................................... S111 • Lockout provision on front operated pushbutton cover (standard on buttons marked "OFF" and "STOP").................. S153 • For 24 VDC operation on pilot lights....................................... S300 • Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counter-clockwise operation...... S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation.... S635 • Bodies and covers (single and two gang units) – copper-free aluminum.................................................................................. SA • Where indicated in the catalog listings, EDS units suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group B usage can be supplied, add suffix -GB, EFS units are suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group B as standard............................................................... GB • Maintained contact mushroom head with lockout and guard. May not be combined with a pilot light if a transformer is required.................................................................................... S769 • Spring return to center from right and left (For DEV43 or DEV44 only).............................................................................. S842 EDS bodies and factory sealed cover and device sub-assemblies are available for field assembly (see page 507). CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se *See suffix GB in Options section www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 511 EDS / EFS Series Control Stations 4C Fully Assembled EFS and EDS Factory Sealed Devices Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Methods of Factory Sealing EDS Series Factory sealed EDS and EFS pilot light, pushbutton and selector switch control stations do not need external sealing. Device contacts are factory sealed in explosionproof ESWP contact blocks. Small, compact enclosures have accurately ground wide flanges on both the body and cover for a flame-tight joint. EDS factory sealed snap switches or manual motor starting switches do not need external sealing. The switches are enclosed in a unique sealing well with double flanges which mate with the cover and the body. Small, compact enclosures have accurately ground wide flanges on body, cover and sealing well for flame-tight joints. Wiring pigtails are factory sealed from under the sealing well. Reliable pouring of seals at the factory ensures safe sealing. 4C EFS/EDS Series Dimensions (Inches) ‡ Covers† Bodies Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 Dim. Dim. "h" "i" /4 /8 1 /16 /16 15 /16 3 13 7 13 Front View - Single gang Pushbutton switch rocker type side operated Side View General use snap switch front operated and manual motor starting switch Pushbutton switch front operated Selector switch Front View - Two gang *See suffix GB in Options section. ‡Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. † Surface covers have same length and width as bodies. 512 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Pushbutton Stations Front Operated, 600VAC Heavy Duty Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C Ordering Information - Single Gang Normal Pos. 1 Circuit Universal Marking 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits■ 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits■ Specify Specify ED12■ Specify Specify STARTSTOP unless otherwise specified ED11 ED12 ED12■ ED12 Diagram Replacement Pushbuttons‡ EDS2184 EDS2190 Enclosure with Pushbuttons 4C Hub Size Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # Cat. #§ Cat. #§ /2 /4 1 Dead End EDS1184 ➀ EDS2184 ➀ EDS3184 ➀ EDS2190 ➀ EDS3190 ➀ EDS115 ➀ EDS215 ➀ EDS315 ➀ EDS2192 ➀ EDS3192 ➀ EDS1155 ➀ EDS2155 ➀ EDS3155 ➀ /2 3 /4 1 Through Feed EDSC1184 ➀ EDSC2184 ➀ EDSC3184 ➀ EDSC1190 ➀ EDSC2190 ➀ EDSC3190 ➀ EDSC115 ➀ EDSC1192 ➀ EDSC215 ➀ EDSC2192 ➀ EDSC315 ➀ EDSC3192 ➀ 1 3 1 EDSC1155 ➀ EDSC2155 ➀ EDSC3155 ➀ EDSC225 Dimensions see page 512 Ordering Information - Two Gang Normal Pos. 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits■ Marking Specify Specify START-STOP unless otherwise specified ED11 ED12 ED12■ Diagram Replacement Pushbuttons‡ Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Size Cat. # Cat. # /4 1 Cat. # Dead End EDS2284 ➀ EDS3284 ➀ EDS2290 ➀ EDS3290 ➀ EDS225 ➀ EDS325 ➀ /2 /4 1 Through Feed EDSC1284 ➀ EDSC2284 ➀ EDSC3284 ➀ EDSC1290 ➀ EDSC2290 ➀ EDSC3290 ➀ EDSC125 ➀ EDSC225 ➀ EDSC325 ➀ 3 1 3 ➀ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: START STOP ON OFF RUN JOG RESET TRIP TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER * Class I, Group B: Consider using EFS series pushbuttons, see page 514. All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I, Group B, Div. 1 usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. These products are suitable for Group B, Div. 2 as listed, without external seals. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory. ■Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, with one normally open and one normally closed. §Single external button operates both inner buttons simultaneously. ‡ For replacement contact blocks, see page 557. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 513 4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EFS Factory Sealed Pushbutton Stations Front Operated, 600VAC Heavy Duty Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Ordering Information Normal Pos. Marking 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits■ 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits■ Specify Specify ED12■ Specify Specify STARTSTOP unless otherwise specified ED11 ED12 ED12■ ED12 Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # EFS2190 ➀ EFS3190 ➀ EFS115 ➀ EFS215 ➀ EFS315 ➀ EFS2192 ➀ EFS3192 ➀ EFS1155 ➀ EFS2155 ➀ EFS3155 ➀ Diagram Replacement Pushbuttons‡ EFS2184 4C Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Size /2 /4 1 Cat. # Dead End EFS1184 ➀ EFS2184 ➀ EFS3184 ➀ /2 /4 1 Through Feed EFSC1184 ➀ EFSC1190 ➀ EFSC115 ➀ EFSC2184 ➀ EFSC2190 ➀ EFSC215 ➀ EFSC3184 ➀ EFSC3190 ➀ EFSC315 ➀ 1 3 1 3 EFSC2190 Dimensions see page 512 EFSC1192 ➀ EFSC1155 ➀ EFSC2192 ➀ EFSC2155 ➀ EFSC3192 ➀ EFSC3155 ➀ ➀ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: START STOP ON OFF RUN JOG RESET TRIP TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER *Class I, Group B: All enclosures listed above are suitable for Class I, Group B, Div. 1 usage. Seals only have to be installed on 1 inch conduit within 5 ft. in Division 1. ‡For replacement contact blocks, see page 557. ■Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, with one normally open and one normally closed. §Single external button operates both inner buttons simultaneously. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 514 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Pushbutton Stations Side Rocker Handle, 600VAC Heavy Duty Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C Dimensions Ordering Information - Single Gang Normal Pos. Specify Two Gang 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits■ Specify START-STOP unless otherwise specified Diagram ED12 Replacement Pushbuttons‡ ED12■ Enclosure with Pushbuttons /2 /4 1 /2 /4 1 Through Feed EDSC1596 ➀ EDSC1194 ➀ EDSC2596 ➀ EDSC2194 ➀ EDSC3596 ➀ EDSC3194 ➀ 3 1 3 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits Specify Specify START-STOP unless otherwise specified ED11 ED12 ED12■ Enclosure with Pushbuttons Cat. # Dead End EDS1596 ➀ EDS2596 ➀ EDS3596 ➀ 1 Marking 1 Circuit Universal Diagram Replacement ED11 Pushbuttons‡ Hub Size Normal Pos. 4C Marking 1 Circuit Universal see page 512 EDS2696 EDSC2162 Cat. # Cat. # Hub Size EDS2194 ➀ EDS3194 ➀ EDS1162 ➀ EDS2162 ➀ EDS3162 ➀ 3 /4 1 Cat. # Dead End EDS2696 ➀ EDS3696 ➀ /2 3 /4 1 Through Feed EDSC1696 ➀ EDSC1294 ➀ EDSC1262 ➀ EDSC2696 ➀ EDSC2294 ➀ EDSC2262 ➀ EDSC3696 ➀ EDSC3294 ➀ EDSC3262 ➀ 1 EDSC1162 ➀ EDSC2162 ➀ EDSC3162 ➀ Cat. # Cat. # EDS2294 ➀ EDS3294 ➀ EDS2262 ➀ EDS3262 ➀ ➀ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: START STOP ON OFF RUN JOG RESET TRIP TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER *Class I, Group B: All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I, Group B, Div. 1 usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. These products are suitable for Group B, Div. 2 as listed, without external seals. ‡For replacement contact blocks, see page 557. ■Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, with one normally open and one normally closed. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 515 4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EFS Pilot Lights Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Applications: EFS pilot lights are used: • In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts • For installation at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To visually indicate at a remote location that the desired function is being performed 4C Features: • Small, compact enclosures with accurately ground flange on both body and cover for flame-tight joint • Pilot lights are factory sealed. Conventional external seals are not required • Dead end (EFS) or through feed (EFSC) hubs – 1/2" to 1" sizes Options: The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Pilot lights for circuit voltages up to 600 volts maximum (standard voltage range 110–125) – See Listings Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC: Class I, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps Bodies and covers – copper-free aluminum 24 VDC operation on pilot lights Standard Materials: • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy (U.S.) and copper-free aluminum (Canada) • Pilot light covers – Feraloy iron alloy • Operating shafts – stainless steel Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized with aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural Electrical Rating Range: • Pilot lights – 110 to 600VAC * External conduit seal required for 1 inch hub size in Division 1, Group B within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of enclosure. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 516 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds LED SA S300 EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EFS Pilot Lights Pilot lights listed below are factory sealed and do not require external seals*. Lamps are 6 watt, type S6, candelabra base for use on 110–125 volt circuits. LED pilot lights can be provided in place of standard incandescent lamps by adding suffix LED after the color symbols. For Options see pages 516–517. Enclosures with single pilot covers only can be equipped with a transformer for each lamp for high voltages as shown. 4C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Transformer Voltages Above 125 Nominal Volts 50–60 Hertz Transformer 220 / 110 440 / 110 550 / 110 Primary Voltage Range Cat. # Suffix 220–240 440–480 550–600 T2 T4 T5 Ordering Information Enclosure with Single Pilot Light‡ Hub Size Dead End Cat. # EFS11561 ➀ EFS21561 ➀ EFS31561 ➀ /2 3 /4 1 1 Through Feed Cat. # EFSC11524 ➀ EFSC21524 ➀ EFSC31524 ➀ 4C /2 EFS11524 ➀ 3 /4 EFS21524 ➀ 1 EFS31524 ➀ Enclosure with Double Pilot Lights‡ Hub Size Dead End Cat. # 1 Through Feed Cat. # EFSC11561 ➀ EFSC21561 ➀ EFSC31561 ➀ ➀ Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. Example: EFS11561 with red and green lights is EFS11561-J1-J3 Color Symbol Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green J1 J3 Amber Clear J6 J10 Blue J11 Dimensions In Inches: Typical body side view Front view Cover † Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 Dim. "h" Dim. "i" /4 7 /8 1 /16 /16 15 /16 3 13 13 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se * External conduit seal required for 1 inch hub size in Division 1, Group B within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of enclosure. ‡ LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED to catalog number after color symbol. † Surface covers have same length and width dimensions as bodies. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 517 4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Combination Pushbutton and Pilot Light Stations 600VAC, Heavy Duty Pushbutton contacts and pilot light receptacles are sealed in separate chambers. External seals are not required. Lamps† are 6 watt, type S6, candelabra base for use on 110–125 volt circuits. Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Two gang units with single pilot light covers can be furnished with transformers. Specify markings for each button. See table below listings. Dimensions 4C see page 512 Ordering Information Single Gang Ordering Information Two Gang Description Dead End No. 1 Pushbuttons Dead End Through Feed Dead End Through Feed No. Pushbuttons 2 2 2 2 No. Pilot Lights† 1 1 2 2 No. Pilot Lights† 1 Through Feed 1 1 Diagram Diagram Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 1 Hub Size Cat. # Cat. # EDS11473 ➀➁ EDSC11473 ➀➁ 1/2 EDS21473 ➀➁ EDSC21473 ➀➁ 3/4 EDS31473 ➀➁ EDSC31473 ➀➁ 1 Cat. # Cat. # EDS12471 ➀➁ EDSC12471 ➀➁ EDS22471 ➀➁ EDSC22471 ➀➁ EDS32471 ➀➁ EDSC32471 ➀➁ Cat. # Cat. # EDS22868 ➀➁ EDSC22868 ➀➁ EDS32868 ➀➁ EDSC32868 ➀➁ ➀ Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. Example: EDS21473 with a red light is EDS21473-J1 Color Symbol Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green J1 J3 Amber Clear J6 J10 Blue J11 ➁ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of stardard markings below: START STOP RESET LIGHT ON EMERGENCY OPEN DOWN RAISE STOP RUN TRIP HAND FORWARD CLOSE IN LOWER ON JOG TEST AUTOMATIC REVERSE UP OUT * All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I, Group B, Division 1 usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Example: EDS11473-J1-GB. Conduit seal(s) must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening. These products are suitable for Group B, Div. 2 as listed, without external conduit seals. † LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED to catalog number after color symbol. For 24 VDC operation on pilot lights add suffix S300. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 518 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Selector Switches Maintained Contact, 600VAC Heavy Duty Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C Furnished with pushbuttons, cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below. Specify indicating plate markings. See table below listings. Dimensions see page 512 4C EDS11273 Ordering Information - Single Gang Enclosure with Switch Style Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Replacement Contact Blocks† Hub Size Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # 3 /2 /4 1 EDS11271 ➀ EDS21271 ➀ EDS31271 ➀ EDSC11271 ➀ EDSC21271 ➀ EDSC31271 ➀ 3 /2 /4 1 EDS11272 ➀ EDS21272 ➀ EDS31272 ➀ EDSC11272 ➀ EDSC21272 ➀ EDSC31272 ➀ 3 /2 /4 1 EDS11273 ➀ EDS21273 ➀ EDS31273 ➀ EDSC11273 ➀ EDSC21273 ➀ EDSC31273 ➀ 3 /2 /4 1 EDS11274 ➀ EDS21274 ➀ EDS31274 ➀ EDSC11274 ➀ EDSC21274 ➀ EDSC31274 ➀ /2 /4 1 EDS11275 ➀ EDS21275 ➀ EDS31275 ➀ EDSC11275 ➀ EDSC21275 ➀ EDSC31275 ➀ 1 Two-Position, Two-Circuit ED11 Two-Position, Four-Circuit ED12 Three-Position, Two-Circuit ‡ ED11 1 1 1 ED12 Three-Position, Four-Circuit ‡ 1 ED12 3 ➀ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Two-Position RUN, JOG HAND, AUTOMATIC FORWARD, REVERSE FAST, SLOW OPEN, CLOSE UP, DOWN ON, OFF IN, OUT RAISE, LOWER START, STOP Three-Position RUN, OFF, JOG HAND, OFF, AUTOMATIC FORWARD, OFF, REVERSE FAST, OFF, SLOW 1, OFF, 2 OPEN, OFF, CLOSE UP, OFF, DOWN *For Class I, Group B: Consider using EFS series selector switches, see page 520. All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I, Group B, Div. 1 usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. These products are suitable for Group B, Div. 2 as listed, without external seals. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory. † For replacement contact blocks, see page 557. ‡ Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See page 511 for explanation of options. CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 519 4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EFS Factory Sealed Selector Switches Maintained Contact, 600VAC Heavy Duty Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Furnished with pushbuttons, cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below. Specify indicating plate markings. See table below listings. Dimensions 4C see page 512 EFS11273 Ordering Information - Single Gang Enclosure with Switch Style Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Replacement Contact Blocks† Hub Size Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # Two-Position, Two-Circuit ED11 3 /2 /4 1 EFS11271 ➀ EFS21271 ➀ EFS31271 ➀ EFSC11271 ➀ EFSC21271 ➀ EFSC31271 ➀ Two-Position, Four-Circuit ED12 3 /2 /4 1 EFS11272 ➀ EFS21272 ➀ EFS31272 ➀ EFSC11272 ➀ EFSC21272 ➀ EFSC31272 ➀ Three-Position, Two-Circuit ‡ ED11 3 /2 /4 1 EFS11273 ➀ EFS21273 ➀ EFS31273 ➀ EFSC11273 ➀ EFSC21273 ➀ EFSC31273 ➀ ED12 3 /2 /4 1 EFS11274 ➀ EFS21274 ➀ EFS31274 ➀ EFSC11274 ➀ EFSC21274 ➀ EFSC31274 ➀ ED12 /2 /4 1 EFS11275 ➀ EFS21275 ➀ EFS31275 ➀ EFSC11275 ➀ EFSC21275 ➀ EFSC31275 ➀ 1 1 1 1 Three-Position, Four-Circuit ‡ 1 ➀If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Two-Position FAST, SLOW IN, OUT RUN, JOG OPEN, CLOSE RAISE, LOWER HAND, AUTOMATIC UP, DOWN START, STOP FORWARD, REVERSE ON, OFF 3 Three-Position RUN, OFF, JOG 1, OFF, 2 HAND, OFF, AUTOMATIC OPEN, OFF, CLOSE FORWARD, OFF, REVERSE UP, OFF, DOWN FAST, OFF, SLOW CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se *Class I, Group B: All enclosures listed above are suitable for Class I, Group B, Div. 1 usage. Seals only have to be installed on 1 inch conduit within 5 ft. in Division 1. † For replacement contact blocks, see page 557. ‡ Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See page 511 for explanation of options. 520 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed General Use Snap Switches Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 4C Dimensions see page 512 EDSC2129 EDS2229 Ordering Information - General Use Snap Switch – Front Operated Hub Size 4C Single Gang Two Gang‡ Amperes Through Feed Cat. # Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # Factory Sealed Replacement Switch Style† 120VAC§ 277VAC§ Dead End Cat. # 20 20 20 20 EDS2129 EDS218 EDSC2129† EDSC218† EDS2229 /4 1-pole 2-pole EDSC2229† EDSC228† SW5 SW6 /4 3-way 20 20 EDS2130 EDSC2130 EDS2230 EDSC2230 SW7 /4 1 4-way 20 20 EDS2140 EDSC2140 EDSC2240 SW8 1-pole 20 20 EDS3129 EDSC3129† EDS3229 EDSC3229† SW5 1 2-pole 20 20 EDS318 EDSC318† EDS328 EDSC328† SW6 /4 3 3 3 3 1 3-way 20 20 EDS3130 EDSC3130 EDS3230 EDSC3230 SW7 1 4-way 20 20 EDS3140 EDSC3140 EDS3240 EDSC3240 SW8 *Class I, Group B: All units on this page can be modified for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory. † ON-OFF standard marking for 1-pole and 2-pole units. ‡ Combinations of switches can be furnished. § AC rated switches are tested for resistive, inductive and tungsten filament loads up to the full current rating and for motor loads up to 80% of the ampere rating. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 521 4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures 4C EDSC2199 EDS2229 Ordering Information 1 2 1 hp 1 hp CrouseHinds Symbol Number 0.17 P1 2.40 P20 0.21 P2 2.58 P21 0.25 P3 2.92 P22 Factory Sealed Replacement Switch 0.32 P4 3.09 Hub Size Poles in. Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 P23 0.39 P5 3.32 P24 0.46 P6 3.77 P25 SW9 SW9 0.57 P7 4.16 P26 0.71 P8 4.51 P27 0.79 P9 4.93 /4 1 3 2 P28 0.87 P10 5.43 P29 Two Gang 3 /4 1 1 /4 1 3 2 115–230 Volts DC Allen-Bradley Switch Cat. # /4 hp A B BUL 600 T0X4 A B BUL 600 T0X5 3 Dead End Cat. # EDS2199 ➀ EDS3199 ➀ Through Feed Cat. # EDSC2199 ➀ EDSC3199 ➀ Table (Allen Bradley) Max. Motor Full-Load Amps Maximum HP Ratings 115–230 Volts AC ➀ Heater Max. Motor Full-Load Amps CrouseHinds Symbol Number With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches Poles Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations EDS21100 ➀ EDS31100 ➀ EDSC21100 ➀ EDSC31100 ➀ SW10 SW10 0.98 P11 6.03 P30 EDS2299 ➀ EDS3299 ➀ EDSC2299 ➀ EDSC3299 ➀ SW9 SW9 1.08 P12 6.83 P31 1.19 P13 7.72 P32 SW10 SW10 1.30 P14 8.24 P33 1.43 P15 8.90 P34 1.58 P16 9.60 P35 1.75 P17 10.80 P36 1.88 P18 12.00 P37 2.13 P19 13.50 P38 15.20 P39 EDS22100 ➀ EDS32100 ➀ EDSC22100 ➀ EDSC32100 ➀ These heaters are for motors rated 40°C continuously. For motors rated 50°C or 55°C, multiply full load motor current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted. Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS21101-W5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. * Class I, Group B: All units on this page can be modified for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory. ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater. Select from the heater table and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS2199-P5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 522 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Ordering Information Ordering Information With General Electric Switches With Cutler-Hammer Switches Maximum HP Ratings 4C Maximum HP Ratings Poles 115–230 Volts AC 115 Volts DC 230 Volts DC G.E. Switch Cat. # 120–240 Poles Volts AC 32 120 240 Cutler-Hammer Volts DC Volts DC Volts DC Switch Cat. # 1 2 1 hp 1 hp 1 hp 1 hp 1 /4 hp 1 hp CR101 Y CR101 H 1 2 1 Poles Hub Dead Size End in. Cat. # Factory Sealed Replacement Switch EDS21093 ➀ EDSC21093 ➀ EDS31093 ➀ EDSC31093 ➀ SW11 SW11 EDS21094 ➀ EDSC21094 ➀ EDS31094 ➀ EDSC31094 ➀ SW12 SW12 Two Gang 3 /4 1 1 EDS22093 ➀ EDSC22093 ➀ EDS32093 ➀ EDSC32093 ➀ SW11 SW11 /4 1 EDS22094 ➀ EDSC22094 ➀ EDS32094 ➀ EDSC32094 ➀ SW12 SW12 /4 1 3 2 3 2 ➀Heater Max. Motor Full-Load Amps .48 .53 .58 .65 .71 .78 .86 .95 1.04 1.14 1.25 1.37 1.49 1.63 1.78 1.95 2.13 2.32 2.53 2.76 3 /4 1 Two Gang 3 /4 1 1 2 CrouseHinds Symbol Number Max. Motor Full-Load Amps CrouseHinds Symbol Number G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 3.01 3.27 3.56 3.88 4.22 4.60 5.00 5.43 5.90 6.41 6.98 7.60 8.25 8.95 9.75 10.60 11.40 12.50 13.60 14.80 16.00 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G39 G40 G41 G42 /4 hp 1 hp 1 1 hp MST01 MST02 Hub Dead Through Factory Sealed Size End Feed Replacement Poles in. Cat. # Cat. # Switch Single Gang 3 /4 EDS21101 ➀ EDSC21101 ➀ SW13 1 1 EDS31101 ➀ EDSC31101 ➀ SW13 2 Table (General Electric) /4 hp /4 hp 1 3 /4 1 ➀Heater Max. Motor Full-Load Amps .43 .48 .53 .58 .64 .71 .78 .87 .95 1.03 1.15 1.27 1.35 1.51 1.67 1.83 1.99 2.23 2.47 2.71 4C Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 Through Feed Cat. # 1 hp 1 hp EDS21102 ➀ EDSC21102 ➀ SW14 EDS31102 ➀ EDSC31102 ➀ SW14 EDS22101 ➀ EDSC22101 ➀ SW13 EDS32101 ➀ EDSC32101 ➀ SW13 EDS22102 ➀ EDSC22102 ➀ SW14 EDS32102 ➀ EDSC32102 ➀ SW14 Table (Cutler-Hammer) CrouseHinds Symbol Number Max. Motor Full-Load Amps CrouseHinds Symbol Number W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 2.95 3.27 3.59 3.99 4.39 4.79 5.26 5.83 6.39 7.03 7.74 8.46 9.35 10.30 11.35 12.47 13.67 15.12 16.00 W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39 Dimensions see page 512 These heaters are for motors rated 40°C continuously. For motors rated 50°C or 55°C, multiply full load motor current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted. Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS21101-W5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. *Class I, Group B: All units on this page can be modified for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory. ➀ Includes one interchangeable heater. Select from the heater table and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS2199-P5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 523 4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B*, C, D Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Fully Assembled EFS Fire Alarm Station Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Applications: EFS Fire Alarm Stations are used: • In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts • For installation at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • To indicate at a remote location that a fire exists in the area Features: • Small, compact enclosures with accurately ground flange on both body and cover for flame-tight joint Ordering Information Certifications and Compliances: 4C EFS21095 • NEC/CEC Class I, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 • As indicated under catalog listings, certain units can be supplied for Class I, Division 1, Group B (NEMA/EEMAC 7B). Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening. Hub Size Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # /4 EFS21095 EFSC21095 3 Dimensions In Inches: Standard Materials: • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy (U.S.) and copper-free aluminum (Canada) Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized with aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural Options: The following special option is available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Where indicated in the catalog listings, units suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group B usage can be supplied............. GB* Typical body side view Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 Front view Cover† Dim."h" Dim."i" 3 /4 /8 1 13 7 13 /16 /16 /16 13 Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. †Surface covers have same length and width dimensions as bodies. *Class I, Group B option: Units listed above can be modified for Class I, Division 1, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Example: EFS21095-GB. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 524 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDS / EFS Series Control Stations For a complete list of components for EDS & EFS Control Stations, see page 500 for FlexStation™ Series 4C Sub-assemby Reference Guide Control Stations and their Sub-assemblies Complete Control Station Sub-assembly Cover & Device Cast Back Box PUSHBUTTONS EDS2184 EDSC2184 EDS215 EDSC215 EDS2190 EDSC2190 EDS2184-S769-EM-SP EDSC2184-S769-EM-SP EDS2284 EDSC2284 EDS225 EDSC225 EDS2290 EDSC2290 DSD918 DSD918 DSD922 DSD922 DSD921 DSD921 DSD918-S769-EM-SP DSD918-S769-EM-SP (2) DSD918 (2) DSD918 (2) DSD922 (2) DSD922 (2) DSD921 (2) DSD921 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 Emergency Stop Legend included Emergency Stop Legend included PILOT LIGHTS EFS21524-J* EFSC21524-J* EFS21561-J*-J* EFSC21561-J*-J* DSD948-J* DSD948-J* DSD947-J*-J* DSD947-J*-J* EDS271 † EDSC271 † EDS271 † EDSC271 † * Insert pilot light color † When using the EFS Series pilot light in Cl. I, Div. 2 applications, the EFS back box is required in place of the EDS. PUSHBUTTON / PILOT LIGHT COMBINATIONS EDS21473-J* DSD958-J* EDSC21473-J* DSD958-J* EDS22471-J* DSD948-J* & DSD921 EDSC22471-J* DSD948-J* & DSD921 EDS22868-J*-J* DSD947-J*-J* & DSD921 EDSC22868-J*-J* DSD947-J*-J* & DSD921 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 * * * * * * SELECTOR SWITCHES EDS21271 EDSC21271 EDS21272 EDSC21272 EDS21273 EDSC21273 EDS21274 EDSC21274 EDS21275 EDSC21275 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH O/L EDS21101 DS415A & SW13 EDSC21101 DS415A & SW13 EDS21102 DS415A & SW14 EDSC21102 DS415A & SW14 EDS21093 DS415A & SW11 EDSC21093 DS415A & SW11 EDS21094 DS415A & SW12 EDSC21094 DS415A & SW12 EDS2199 DS415A & SW9 EDSC2199 DS415A & SW9 EDS21100 DS415A & SW10 EDSC21100 DS415A & SW10 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included 4C DSD923 DSD923 DSD924 DSD924 DSD925 DSD925 DSD926 DSD926 DSD927 DSD927 Notes and Requirements Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included Insert Insert Insert Insert Insert Insert pilot pilot pilot pilot pilot pilot light light light light light light color color color color color color "-W * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-W * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-W * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-W * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 525 EDS / EFS Series Control Stations 4C Sub-assembly Reference Guide For a complete list of components for EDS & EFS Control Stations, see page 500 for FlexStation™ Series CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Control Stations and their Sub-assemblies 4C Sub-assembly Complete Control Station Cover & Device Cast Back Box MANUAL MOTOR STARTER EFD218-T8 Alternative EFDC218-T8 Alternative EFD2419 Alternative EFDC2419 Alternative DSD916 DS415A & DSD916 DS415A & DSD917 DS415A & DSD917 DS415A & EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 SNAP SWITCHES EDS2129 Alternative EDSC2129 Alternative EDS218 Alternative EDSC218 Alternative EDS2130 Alternative EDSC2130 Alternative EDS2140 Alternative EDSC2140 Alternative EDS2229 Alternative EDSC2229 Alternative EDSC228 Alternative EDS2230 Alternative EDSC2230 Alternative EDSC2240 Alternative DS652 & SW5 DSD933 DS652 & SW5 DSD933 DS652 & SW6 DSD634 DS652 & SW6 DSD634 DS652 & SW7 DSD936 DS652 & SW7 DSD936 DS652 & SW8 DSD937 DS652 & SW8 DSD937 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD933 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD933 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD634 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD936 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD936 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD937 ROCKER SWITCHES EDS2596 EDSC2596 EDS2162 EDSC2162 EDS2194 EDSC2194 EDS2696 EDSC2696 EDS2262 EDSC2262 EDS2294 EDSC2294 DSD949 DSD949 DSD951 DSD951 DSD950 DSD950 (2) DSD949 (2) DSD949 (2) DSD951 (2) DSD951 (2) DSD950 (2) DSD950 SQ D 2510 KO-1 SQ D 2510 KO-1 GE 2368S GE 2368S SW5 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW7 SW8 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 Notes and Requirements SQ D switch provided by distributor SQ D switch provided by distributor GE switch provided by distributor GE switch provided by distributor External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included Additional notes: • See Cooper Crouse-Hinds installation instructions for any possible additional sealing requirements. • Part numbers listed with 3/4" hub in back box (Ex. EDS2184). For 1/2" hub change the "2" to "1" (EDS1184). For 1" hub change the "2" to "3" (EDS3184). • Control Stations with "Stop" legend have Lockout provided as standard. • Pilot Light Colors J*-- J1= Red, J3= Green, J6= Amber, J10= Clear, J11= Blue. LED Pilot Lights are available with LED Suffix. • Pilot Light Transformers for voltages over 125V. Suffix T2= 240/220 - 110V, T4= 480/440 - 110V, T5= 600/550 - 110V (Not available on double pilot cover). • Standard Legend Plate markings are available by adding nomenclature after the part number (EDS2184-Run). • Selector Switch Nameplate kits available. 2-Pos = "SS2KIT", 3-Pos = "SS3KIT". See Replacement Parts book for additional information. • Copper-Free Aluminum Bodies and Covers available with SA Suffix. • Additional Control Station Options may be found in section 4C. • Group B ratings may be achieved by adding the GB suffix or using the EFS back box. See part number instructions for the item required. • Group B ratings may already be achieved when used in Class I, Division 2 applications. See Certifications and Compliances for item required. • Additional Control Station configurations available through the FlexStation Component series. 526 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds MC and MCC Series 4C NEMA 3, 4 Watertight Pushbutton Stations, Selector Switches and Pilot Lights 600 VAC Heavy Duty Options: MC pushbuttons or selector switches are used: • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors MC pilot lights are used: • To visually indicate at a remote point that the desired function is being performed (motor running, etc.) MC pushbuttons, selector switches or pilot lights are used: • In damp, wet or corrosive locations such as dairies, meat packing plants, chemical plants and outdoor locations The following special options are available by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Lockout provision on front operated pushbutton (standard on buttons marked "OFF" and "STOP")........................................................................................................ S153 Neoprene covers for front operated pushbuttons. Meets NEMA 4 requirements and prevents accumulation of dirt around operating shafts................................................. S323 Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counter-clockwise operation....................................................................... S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation.................................................................. S635 Multiple gang bodies. Two gang, two gang tandem and three, four or five gang bodies can be supplied with combinations of single gang devices.............................. Specify LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps..................................... LED Features: Dimensions • Enclosures are compact in design, and gasketed to meet NEMA/EEMAC 3 or 4 requirements as noted in catalog listings • Pushbutton stations with side rocker handle are furnished with a lockout arrangement on "STOP" position as standard • Dead end (MC) or through feed (MCC) hubs – 1/2" and 3/4" sizes – with mounting feet • Standard lockout on "STOP" and "OFF" button on front operated pushbutton covers • Standard lockout on selector switch covers. Locks two or three position switch handle in any position. 4C Applications: In Inches*: Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA/EEMAC 3, 4 • UL Standard: 508 • CSA Encl. 3, 4, 5 Standard Materials: • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy • Cover with side rocker handle – copperfree aluminum • Front pushbutton, selector switch and pilot light covers – Feraloy iron alloy • Rocker handle and pushbutton guards – type 6 / 6 nylon • Selector switch handle – copper-free aluminum • Operating shafts – stainless steel Hub size 1 /2 3 /4 a Type of Cover b /8 3 /4 Side Rocker Handle Front Pushbutton Selector Switch Pilot Light 11/2 23/8 23/8 11/16 5 Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Type 6 / 6 nylon – black • Stainless steel – natural CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 527 4C MC and MCC Series Watertight Weather Resistant NEMA 3, 4 Pushbutton Stations, Selector Switches and Pilot Lights 600 VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information - With Side Rocker Handles Watertight, NEMA 3, 4 Enclosure with Rocker Handles Normal Positions 4C MC dead end side rocker handle 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal Replacement Contact Diagram Blocks‡ Marking Hub Dead End Size Cat. # /2 /4 MC1810U1 ➀ MCC1810U1 ➀ MC2810U1 ➀ MCC2810U1 ➀ /2 /4 MC1810U ➀ MC2810U ➀ MCC1810U ➀ MCC2810U ➀ /2 /4 MC1810 ➀ MC2810 ➀ MCC1810 ➀ MCC2810 ➀ 1 Specify ED11 Specify ED12 3 1 START-STOP unless 2 Circuits 1 Open - A otherwise 1 Closed - B specified 3 1 ED12* Through Feed Cat. # 3 Ordering Information - With Front Pushbuttons Weather Resistant, NEMA 3 § Enclosure with Pushbuttons Normal Positions MCC through feed side rocker handle 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal Replacement Contact Diagram Blocks‡ Marking Hub Dead End Size Cat. # /2 /4 MC1910U1 ➀ MCC1910U1 ➀ MC2910U1 ➀ MCC2910U1 ➀ /2 /4 MC1910U ➀ MC2910U ➀ MCC1910U ➀ MCC2910U ➀ /2 /4 MC1910 ➀ MC2910 ➀ MCC1910 ➀ MCC2910 ➀ 1 Specify ED11 Specify ED12 3 1 START-STOP unless 2 Circuits 1 Open - A otherwise 1 Closed - B specified 3 1 ED12* Through Feed Cat. # 3 ➀ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: MC dead end front pushbutton START OFF RESET LIGHT ON STOP RUN TRIP HAND ON JOG TEST AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY OPEN DOWN RAISE FORWARD CLOSE IN LOWER REVERSE UP OUT MCC through feed front pushbutton CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se *Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, with one normally open and one normally closed. § For Watertight NEMA 4 rating, use suffix S323 (Neoprene button covers). See Options section. ‡For replacement pushbuttons see page 557 528 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds MC and MCC Series 4C Watertight NEMA 3, 4 Pushbutton Stations, Selector Switches and Pilot Lights 600 VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information - Selector Switches Furnished with pushbutton contact blocks, cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below. Maintained Contact Style MC dead end selector switch Position 1 Enclosure with Selector Switch Position 2 Position 3 TwoPosition, TwoCircuit Replacement Contact Blocks* Hub Size Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # /2 /4 MC11271 ➀ MC21271 ➀ MCC11271 ➀ MCC21271 ➀ /2 /4 MC11272 ➀ MC21272 ➀ MCC11272 ➀ MCC21272 ➀ /2 /4 MC11273 ➀ MC21273 ➀ MCC11273 ➀ MCC21273 ➀ /2 /4 MC11274 ➀ MC21274 ➀ MCC11274 ➀ MCC21274 ➀ /2 /4 MC11275 ➀ MC21275 ➀ MCC11275 ➀ MCC21275 ➀ 1 ED11 3 1 TwoPosition, FourCircuit ED12 3 4C ThreePosition, TwoCircuit † 1 ED11 3 1 ED12 ThreePosition, FourCircuit † 3 1 ED12 3 ➀ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: START OFF RESET LIGHT ON STOP RUN TRIP HAND ON JOG TEST AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY OPEN DOWN RAISE FORWARD CLOSE IN LOWER REVERSE UP OUT Ordering Information - Pilot Lights‡ Enclosure with Jewel Cover and Lamp MC dead end pilot light Primary Voltage Range Lamp Base Lamp Watts Hub Size Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # 110–125 110–125 Candelabra Candelabra 6 6 1 /2 /4 MC180 J1 MC-280-J1 MCC180 J1 MCC280 J1 220–250 220–250 Intermediate Intermediate 10 10 1 /2 /4 MC184 J1 MC-284-J1 MCC184 J1 MCC284 J1 440–480 440–480 Candelabra Candelabra 6 6 1 /2 /4 MC182 J1 MC282 J1 MCC182 J1 MCC282 J1 3 3 3 CHS Controls AB * For replacement contact blocks see page 557. † Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See explanation in Options section. ‡LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED after color symbol (J1). www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 529 4C N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 4C Applications: N2S and N2SC pushbutton stations, selector switches and pilot lights are suitable for use: • In Class I, Groups B, C, D; Division 2 hazardous areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to accidental or abnormal operation • In damp, wet, or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors in Division 2 areas of petroleum refineries, chemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist N2S and N2SC pushbutton stations and selector switches are used: • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors N2S and N2SC pilot lights are used: • To visually indicate at a remote location that the desired function is being performed Optional maintained stop pushbutton(s) are used: As emergency or normal stop button(s) in motor control circuits for positive shutdown. Features: Options: The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Padlock attachments for all pushbuttons. For "START-STOP" stations, only "STOP" button provided with lockout............................................................................................. S708 Three position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counterclockwise operation............................................................................................... S634 Momentary contact counterclockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation.............................................................................................. S635 Control station with maintained stop pushbutton (requires NCD type enclosure): One maintained stop pushbutton...................................................................................... MSR1 Two maintained stop pushbuttons.................................................................................... MSR2 Maintained stop pushbuttons are installed at bottom position(s) of control station unless otherwise specified. • Pushbutton stations, pilot lights, and selector switch devices are factory sealed. External seals are not required. • Enclosures are made of Krydon® fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat and sunlight. • Optional maintained stop feature operates by depressing the mushroom head pushbutton. Pushbutton must be manually pulled before start button can be actuated. • Lockout is standard on selector switch devices. • Factory installed dead end (N2S) or through feed (N2SC) hubs – 1/2", 3/4", and 1" sizes. • Indicating plates are available with a choice of 40 standard markings. • Grounding plate included with each hub. LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps........................................ LED Dimensions In Inches: Certifications and Compliances: • NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C & D • NEMA: 3, 4X, 7BCD (Division 2) and 12 • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 Nos. 14 & 30 Electrical Rating Ranges: • Pushbutton stations and selector switches – heavy duty 600 VAC maximum • Pilot lights – 120 to 600 VAC Maintained Stop Pushbutton † Use dimension "e" for control station with 1" hub or maintained stop pushbutton. Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. N2S(C) Body Style 1 or 2 devices 3 or 4 devices Outside Dims. I w Mounting (NCS)* (NCD)* Dims. d e ml mw 1 /2" & 3/4" Hubs a b 1" Hubs a b 71/4 313/16 43/8 53/8 63/8 215/16 11/8 11/16 11/4 15/16 113/4 313/16 43/8 53/8 107/8 215/16 11/8 11/16 11/4 15/16 *NCS box is supplied with units using 1/2" and 3/4" hubs. NCD box is supplied with units using 1" hubs or MSR option. ‡ NCD 4 device box used with 1" hubs or MSR option. 530 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations 4C Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information - With Pilot Lights‡* No. Units Diagram 1 2 3 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 N2S1131 N2S1132 N2S1134 N2S1135 N2S1231 N2S1232 N2S1234 N2S1235 N2S1331 N2S1332 N2S1334 N2S1335 N2S1431 N2S1432 N2S1434 N2S1435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ N2SC1131 N2SC1132 N2SC1134 N2SC1135 N2SC1231 N2SC1232 N2SC1234 N2SC1235 N2SC1331 N2SC1332 N2SC1334 N2SC1335 N2SC1431 N2SC1432 N2SC1434 N2SC1435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ /4" Hubs Dead End Cat. # 3 N2S2131 N2S2132 N2S2134 N2S2135 N2S2231 N2S2232 N2S2234 N2S2235 N2S2331 N2S2332 N2S2334 N2S2335 N2S2431 N2S2432 N2S2434 N2S2435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ Through Feed Cat. # N2SC2131 N2SC2132 N2SC2134 N2SC2135 N2SC2231 N2SC2232 N2SC2234 N2SC2235 N2SC2331 N2SC2332 N2SC2334 N2SC2335 N2SC2431 N2SC2432 N2SC2434 N2SC2435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ 1" Hubs Dead End Cat. # N2S3131 N2S3132 N2S3134 N2S3135 N2S3231 N2S3232 N2S3234 N2S3235 N2S3331 N2S3332 N2S3334 N2S3335 N2S3431 N2S3432 N2S3434 N2S3435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ Through Feed Cat. # N2SC3131 N2SC3132 N2SC3134 N2SC3135 N2SC3231 N2SC3232 N2SC3234 N2SC3235 N2SC3331 N2SC3332 N2SC3334 N2SC3335 N2SC3431 N2SC3432 N2SC3434 N2SC3435 ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ 4C 4 Volts Enclosure with Pilot Lights 1 /2" Hubs Dead End Through Cat. # Feed Cat. # Ordering Information - With Selector Switches Switch Position Style 1 2 3 Marking Unless Otherwise Specified Enclosure With Selector Switch Hub Size Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # Two-Position, Two-Circuit START-STOP (or Specify) 3 /2 /4 1 N2S1121 ➁ N2S2121 ➁ N2S3121 ➁ N2SC1121 ➁ N2SC2121 ➁ N2SC3121 ➁ Two-Position, Four-Circuit START-STOP (or Specify) 3 /2 /4 1 N2S1122 ➁ N2S2122 ➁ N2S3122 ➁ N2SC1122 ➁ N2SC2122 ➁ N2SC3122 ➁ Three-Position, Two-Circuit † Specify 3 /2 /4 1 N2S1123 ➁ N2S2123 ➁ N2S3123 ➁ N2SC1123 ➁ N2SC2123 ➁ N2SC3123 ➁ Three-Position, Four-Circuit † 3 Specify /2 /4 1 N2S1124 ➁ N2S2124 ➁ N2S3124 ➁ N2SC1124 ➁ N2SC2124 ➁ N2SC3124 ➁ Three-Position, Four-Circuit † Specify /2 /4 1 N2S1125 ➁ N2S2125 ➁ N2S3125 ➁ N2SC1125 ➁ N2SC2125 ➁ N2SC3125 ➁ 1 1 1 1 1 3 ➀ Specify lens color for each pilot light. As an example, N2S1231 with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231-J1-J3. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11 ➁ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Pushbuttons: REVERSE Selector Switches – Two-Position: Selector Switches – Three-Position: OPEN START CLOSE RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG STOP UP HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO ON DOWN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV OFF IN FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW RUN OUT OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 JOG RAISE UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE TRIP LOWER ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN RESET IN-OUT TEST RAISE-LOWER LIGHT ON START-STOP HAND CHS Controls AB AUTOMATIC Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 EMERGENCY chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se FORWARD ‡ Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. Lamp type is 120MB, 120 volts, 3 watts. * LED pilot lights are available. Add suffix LED after last color symbol. See Options Sections for more information. † Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See explanation in Options section. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 531 4C N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information - With Pushbuttons – Momentary Contact No. Units Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Dead End Size Cat. # Marking Unless Otherwise Specified Contact Symbol 1 START (or Specify) 3 /2 /4 1 N2S1110 ➁ N2S2110 ➁ N2S3110 ➁ N2SC1110 ➁ N2SC2110 ➁ N2SC3110 ➁ 2 START-STOP (or Specify) 3 /2 /4 1 N2S1210 ➁ N2S2210 ➁ N2S3210 ➁ N2SC1210 ➁ N2SC2210 ➁ N2SC3210 ➁ 3 Specify 3 /2 /4 1 N2S1310 ➁ N2S2310 ➁ N2S3310 ➁ N2SC1310 ➁ N2SC2310 ➁ N2SC3310 ➁ 4 Specify /2 /4 1 N2S1410 ➁ N2S2410 ➁ N2S3410 ➁ N2SC1410 ➁ N2SC2410 ➁ N2SC3410 ➁ 1 1 1 1 4C Through Feed Cat. # 3 Ordering Information - Combination Control Stations Enclosure With Pushbuttons and Pilot Lights Pilot Lights* Pushbuttons Diagram Markings Hub Size Volts N2S12411 ➀➁ N2SC12411 ➀➁ N2S22411 ➀➁ N2SC22411 ➀➁ N2S32411 ➀➁ N2SC32411 ➀➁ 480 N2S12414 ➀➁ N2SC12414 ➀➁ N2S22414 ➀➁ N2SC22414 ➀➁ N2S32414 ➀➁ N2SC32414 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S12412 ➀➁ N2SC12412 ➀➁ N2S22412 ➀➁ N2SC22412 ➀➁ N2S32412 ➀➁ N2SC32412 ➀➁ 600 N2S12415 ➀➁ N2SC12415 ➀➁ N2S22415 ➀➁ N2SC22415 ➀➁ N2S32415 ➀➁ N2SC32415 ➀➁ 3 /2 /4 1 120 N2S13421 ➀➁ N2SC13421 ➀➁ N2S23421 ➀➁ N2SC23421 ➀➁ N2S33421 ➀➁ N2SC33421 ➀➁ 480 N2S13424 ➀➁ N2SC13424 ➀➁ N2S23424 ➀➁ N2SC23424 ➀➁ N2S33424 ➀➁ N2SC33424 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S13422 ➀➁ N2SC13422 ➀➁ N2S23422 ➀➁ N2SC23422 ➀➁ N2S33422 ➀➁ N2SC33422 ➀➁ 600 N2S13425 ➀➁ N2SC13425 ➀➁ N2S23425 ➀➁ N2SC23425 ➀➁ N2S33425 ➀➁ N2SC33425 ➀➁ 3 /2 /4 1 120 N2S13411 ➀➁ N2SC13411 ➀➁ N2S23411 ➀➁ N2SC23411 ➀➁ N2S33411 ➀➁ N2SC33411 ➀➁ 480 N2S13414 ➀➁ N2SC13414 ➀➁ N2S23414 ➀➁ N2SC23414 ➀➁ N2S33414 ➀➁ N2SC33414 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S13412 ➀➁ N2SC13412 ➀➁ N2S23412 ➀➁ N2SC23412 ➀➁ N2S33412 ➀➁ N2SC33412 ➀➁ 600 N2S13415 ➀➁ N2SC13415 ➀➁ N2S23415 ➀➁ N2SC23415 ➀➁ N2S33415 ➀➁ N2SC33415 ➀➁ 3 /2 /4 1 120 N2S14421 ➀➁ N2SC14421 ➀➁ N2S24421 ➀➁ N2SC24421 ➀➁ N2S34421 ➀➁ N2SC34421 ➀➁ 480 N2S14424 ➀➁ N2SC14424 ➀➁ N2S24424 ➀➁ N2SC24424 ➀➁ N2S34424 ➀➁ N2SC34424 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S14422 ➀➁ N2SC14422 ➀➁ N2S24422 ➀➁ N2SC24422 ➀➁ N2S34422 ➀➁ N2SC34422 ➀➁ 600 N2S14425 ➀➁ N2SC14425 ➀➁ N2S24425 ➀➁ N2SC24425 ➀➁ N2S34425 ➀➁ N2SC34425 ➀➁ 3 1 Specify 2 1 3 1 2 Specify 1 1 3 1 2 2 Specify Through Feed Cat. # 120 1 1 Dead End Volts Cat. # /2 /4 1 Specify 1 Through Feed Cat. # 3 1 1 Dead End Cat. # 1 3 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se ➀ See page 533 ➁ See page 533 * LED pilot lights are available. Add suffix LED after last color symbol. See Options Sections for more information. 532 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations 4C Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information - Combination Control Stations Selector Switches Position No. Pilot Push Lights* buttons 1 2 1 2 Enclosure With Pilot Light, Pushbuttons and Selector Switch 3 Hub Dead End Markings Size Volts Cat. # 2-Pos, 2-Cct N2S145211 ➀➁ N2SC145211 ➀➁ N2S245211 ➀➁ N2SC245211 ➀➁ 480 N2S345211 ➀➁ N2SC345211 ➀➁ N2S145214 ➀➁ N2SC145214 ➀➁ N2S245214 ➀➁ N2SC245214 ➀➁ N2S345214 ➀➁ N2SC345214 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S145212 ➀➁ N2SC145212 ➀➁ N2S245212 ➀➁ N2SC245212 ➀➁ 600 N2S345212 ➀➁ N2SC345212 ➀➁ N2S145215 ➀➁ N2SC145215 ➀➁ N2S245215 ➀➁ N2SC245215 ➀➁ N2S345215 ➀➁ N2SC345215 ➀➁ 3 /2 /4 1 120 N2S145231 ➀➁ N2SC145231 ➀➁ N2S245231 ➀➁ N2SC245231 ➀➁ 480 N2S345231 ➀➁ N2SC345231 ➀➁ N2S145234 ➀➁ N2SC145234 ➀➁ N2S245234 ➀➁ N2SC245234 ➀➁ N2S345234 ➀➁ N2SC345234 ➀➁ /2 /4 1 240 N2S145232 ➀➁ N2SC145232 ➀➁ N2S245232 ➀➁ N2SC245232 ➀➁ 600 N2S345232 ➀➁ N2SC345232 ➀➁ N2S145235 ➀➁ N2SC145235 ➀➁ N2S245235 ➀➁ N2SC245235 ➀➁ N2S345235 ➀➁ N2SC345235 ➀➁ 1 Specify 1 3 ➀ Specify lens color for each pilot light. As an example, N2S1231 with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231-J1-J3. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11 ➁ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Pushbuttons: REVERSE Selector Switches – Two-Position: Selector Switches – Three-Position: OPEN START CLOSE RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG STOP UP HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO ON DOWN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV OFF IN FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW RUN OUT OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 JOG RAISE UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE TRIP LOWER ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN RESET IN-OUT TEST RAISE-LOWER LIGHT ON START-STOP HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se ‡ Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. Lamp type is 120MB, 120 volts, 3 watts. * LED pilot lights are available. Add suffix LED after last color symbol. See Options Sections for more information. † Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See explanation in Options section. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 533 4C 120 3 3-Pos, 2-Cct Through Feed Cat. # /2 /4 1 1 2 Dead End Volts Cat. # 3 1 Specify 1 Through Feed Cat. # N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations 4C Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information - Custom-Built, Factory Assembled Control Stations To order your custom-built factory assembled control station, select the enclosure required and add the desired devices from listings below. Custom-built factory assembled control stations may thus be ordered as follows: Requirements: 3-device control station on Krydon® material enclosure with 3/4" through feed hubs, with 1 pilot light with green jewel, rated at 120V; 1 three position, two circuit selector switch marked HAND-OFF-AUTO; and 1 green single circuit pushbutton marked START. ORDER: 4C NCDC23FA N2P310-J3 N2SW11311-HAND-OFF-AUTO N2PS1111G-START Pilot light jewel symbol, pushbutton and selector switch plate markings are selected from footnote tables. Suffix FA indicates factory assembled. Note that order of assembly of control stations should be listed in desired mounting order, reading from top to bottom of enclosure. Enclosures (NCD or NCDC enclosures must be used with MSR1 or MSR2) Without Hubs Cat. # With One Hub 1/2" Cat. # With Two Hub 1/2" Cat. # With One Hub 3/4" Cat. # With Two Hub 3/4" Cat. # With One Hub 1" Cat. # With Two Hub 1" Cat. # 2 NCD01 NCD02 NCD11 NCD12 NCDC11 NCDC12 NCD21 NCD22 NCDC21 NCDC22 NCD31 NCD32 NCDC31 NCDC32 3 NCD03 NCD13 NCDC13 NCD23 NCDC23 NCD33 NCDC33 4 NCD04 NCD14 NCDC14 NCD24 NCDC24 NCD34 NCDC34 No. of Devices Without Hubs Cat. # With One Hub (3/4") Cat. # With Two Hub (3/4") Cat. # With One Hub (1/2") Cat. # With Two Hub (1/2") Cat. # 2 NCS01 NCS02 NCS21 NCS22 NCSC21 NCSC22 NCS11 NCS12 NCSC11 NCSC12 3 NCS03 NCS23 NCSC23 NCS13 NCSC13 4 NCS04 NCS24 NCSC24 NCS14 NCSC14 No. of Devices 1 1 Pilot Lights‡* Transformer Type Pilot lights to be used in N2SU Series: Volts Cat. # Red N2PLU10 J1 LED 120 240 480 600 N2PL10 N2PL20 N2PL40 N2PL50 Green N2PLU10 J3 LED ➀ ➀ ➀ ➀ Amber N2PLU10 J6 LED Clear N2PLU10 J10 LED Blue N2PLU10 J11 LED ➀ Specify lens color for each pilot light using symbols below. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red J1 Clear J10 Green J3 Blue J11 Amber J6 CHS Controls AB ‡ Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. Lamp type is 120MB, 120 volts, 3 watts. * LED pilot lights are available. Add suffix LED after last color symbol. See Options Sections for more information. 534 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Pushbutton Stations – Momentary Contact Color of Operator 1 Circuit Contact Universal Symbol Cat. # Closure Plug 2 Circuit Contact Universal Symbol Cat. # Natural N2PS1111 ➁ N2PS1211 ➁ Red N2PS1111R ➁ N2PS1211R ➁ Green N2PS1111G ➁ Red Mushroom Head N2PM1111 S111 ➁ 4C Description Cat. # Closure Plug NP2 N2PS1211G ➁ 4C Selector Switches Style Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Cat. # Two Position Two Circuit N2SW11211 ➁ Two Position Four Circuit N2SW12221 ➁ Three Position Two Circuit † N2SW11311 ➁ Three Position Four Circuit † N2SW12321 ➁ Three Position Four Circuit † N2SW12322 ➁ ➁ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Pushbuttons: REVERSE Selector Switches – Selector Switches – START OPEN Two-Positions: Three-Position: STOP CLOSE RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG ON UP HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO OFF DOWN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV RUN IN FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW JOG OUT OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 TRIP RAISE UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE RESET LOWER ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN TEST IN-OUT LIGHT ON RAISE-LOWER HAND START-STOP AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se † Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See explanation in Options section. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 535 N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations 4C Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Dimensions 4C In Inches: N2S For 1/2" and 3/4" hub sizes (for 1" hub and/or MSR option, see page 530). N2S(C) Body Style 1 device 2 devices Outside Dimensions l w d Mounting Dimensions ml mw 71/4 71/4 313/16 313/16 43/8 43/8 63/8 63/8 215/16 215/16 3 devices 91/2 313/16 43/8 85/8 215/16 4 devices 11 /4 3 /16 4 /8 10 /8 215/16 3 13 3 7 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 536 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds N2SU/N2SCU Control Stations Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G 4C Corrosion-Resistant Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 CHS Controls AB Applications: Size Ranges: N2SU and N2SCU pushbutton stations, selector switches and pilot lights are suitable for use: • In Class I, Groups B, C, D; Division 2 and Class I, Zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to accidental or abnormal operation • In damp, wet, or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors in Division 2 and Class I, Zones 1 and 2 areas of petroleum refineries, chemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist N2SU and N2SCU pushbutton stations and selector switches are used: • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors N2SU and N2SCU pilot lights are used: • To visually indicate at a remote location that the desired function is being performed Optional maintained stop pushbutton(s) are used: As emergency or normal stop button(s) in motor control circuits for positive shutdown. • 1, 2, 3 and 4-device units Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Electrical Rating Ranges: • Pushbutton stations and selector switches – heavy duty 600VAC maximum • Pilot lights – 120 to 600 VAC Options: Note: Suffix S708 S634 S635 In addition to hub arrangements shown, the following can be obtained by inserting these codes for the 4th and 5th character in the catalog number: D = Double 1/ 2" hubs at bottom CD = Single hub at top, double 1/ 2" hubs at bottom DD = Double 1/ 2" hubs at each end Dimensions In Inches: Features: • Compact, strong, durable enclosures are made of Vestamid™ – a black molded high impact strength, polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat. • Exterior parts of pushbuttons, pilot lights, and selector switches are made of Krydon material. See pages 538–539 for device part numbers • Pushbutton design uses a unique internal neoprene boot which completely encloses all internal parts. A wiping gasket around the pushbutton cleans the wall of the pushbutton guard of any foreign material accumulation as the button is operated. • Formed-in-place gasket, and stainless steel screws for added corrosion resistance. • Pushbutton and pilot light guards are fluted for no-slip installation. • Factory installed dead end (N2SU) or through feed (N2SCU) hubs – 1 /2" and 3/4" sizes. • Legend plates are available with 40 standard markings. • Lockout is standard on selector switch devices. • LED lamps are standard to provide longer life. Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA: 3, 4X, 7BCD and 12 • UL Standard: 508 • CSA C22.2 No. 14 & 30 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 537 4C Description Padlock attachments for all pushbuttons. For "START-STOP" stations, only "STOP" button provided with lockout...................................................................... Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counterclockwise operation ............................................................................................. Momentary contact counterclockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation ............................................................................................ 4C N2SU/N2SCU Control Stations Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Corrosion-Resistant Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant Weatherproof 600VAC Heavy Duty NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Ordering Information - With Pushbuttons – Momentary Contact Marking Unless Otherwise Specified No. Units Contact Symbol Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Size Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # /2 /4 N2S1110U ➁ N2S2110U ➁ N2SC1110U ➁ N2SC2110U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1210U ➁ N2S2210U ➁ N2SC1210U ➁ N2SC2210U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1310U ➁ N2S2310U ➁ N2SC1310U ➁ N2SC2310U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1410U ➁ N2S2410U ➁ N2SC1410U ➁ N2SC2410U ➁ START (or Specify) 1 1 START-STOP (or Specify) 1 2 3 Specify 4 Specify 3 3 1 3 1 4C 3 Maintained pushbutton with pilot light control station Ordering Information - With Selector Switches* Position Style 1 2 3 Marking Unless Otherwise Specified Enclosure with One Selector Switch Two-Position, Two-Circuit START-STOP (or Specify) Two-Position, Four-Circuit START-STOP (or Specify) Three-Position, Two-Circuit Specify Hub Size Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # /2 /4 N2S1121U ➁ N2S2121U ➁ N2SC1121U ➁ N2SC2121U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1122U ➁ N2S2122U ➁ N2SC1122U ➁ N2SC2122U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1123U ➁ N2S2123U ➁ N2SC1123U ➁ N2SC2123U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1124U ➁ N2S2124U ➁ N2SC1124U ➁ N2SC2124U ➁ /2 /4 N2S1125U ➁ N2S2125U ➁ N2SC1125U ➁ N2SC2125U ➁ 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 Three-Position, Four-Circuit Specify Three-Position, Four-Circuit Specify 3 1 3 ➁ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Push Buttons: REVERSE Selector Switches – Selector Switches – START OPEN Two-Position: Three-Position STOP CLOSE RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG ON UP HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO OFF DOWN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV RUN IN FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW JOG OUT OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 TRIP RAISE UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE RESET LOWER ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN TEST IN-OUT LIGHT ON RAISE-LOWER HAND START-STOP AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se *Replacement switch for selector switches is Cat. No. ESWP126. 538 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds N2SU/N2SCU Control Stations Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G 4C Corrosion-Resistant Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty Ordering Information - With Pilot Lights - Transformer Type Enclosure with Pilot Lights† /2" Hubs /4" Hubs 1 No. Units 3 Through Feed Cat. # Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # 1 120 240 N2S1131U ➀ N2S1132U ➀ N2SC1131U ➀ N2SC1132U ➀ N2S2131U ➀ N2S2132U ➀ N2SC2131U ➀ N2SC2132U ➀ 2 120 240 N2S1231U ➀ N2S1232U ➀ N2SC1231U ➀ N2SC1232U ➀ N2S2231U ➀ N2S2232U ➀ N2SC2231U ➀ N2SC2232U ➀ 3 120 240 N2S1331U ➀ N2S1332U ➀ N2SC1331U ➀ N2SC1332U ➀ N2S2331U ➀ N2S2332U ➀ N2SC2331U ➀ N2SC2332U ➀ 4 120 240 N2S1431U ➀ N2S1432U ➀ N2SC1431U ➀ N2SC1432U ➀ N2S2431U ➀ N2S2432U ➀ N2SC2431U ➀ N2SC2432U ➀ Diagram 4C Volts Dead End Cat. # ➀ Specify lens color for each pilot light. As an example, N2S1231U with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231U-J1-J3 Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11 †Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 539 Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Corrosion-Resistant Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant Weatherproof 600VAC Heavy Duty NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 4C N2SU/N2SCU Control Stations Ordering Information - Combination Control Stations†* Pilot Lights* Pushbuttons 1 1 Specify STARTSTOP (or Specify) 2 Volts Enclosure with Push Buttons and Pilot Lights† 3 /2" Hubs /4" Hubs Dead End Through Feed Dead End Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # 120 240 N2S12411U ➀➁ N2S12412U ➀➁ N2SC12411U ➀➁ N2SC12412U ➀➁ N2S22411U ➀➁ N2S22412U ➀➁ N2SC22411U ➀➁ N2SC22412U ➀➁ 120 240 N2S13421U ➀➁ N2S13422U ➀➁ N2SC13421U ➀➁ N2SC13422U ➀➁ N2S23421U ➀ N2S23422U ➀ N2SC23421U ➀➁ N2SC23422U ➀➁ 120 240 N2S13411U ➀➁ N2S13412U ➀➁ N2SC13411U ➀➁ N2SC13412U ➀➁ N2S23411U ➀➁ N2S23412U ➀➁ N2SC23411U ➀➁ N2SC23412U ➀➁ 120 240 N2S14421U ➀➁ N2S14422U ➀➁ N2SC14421U ➀➁ N2SC14422U ➀➁ N2S24421U ➀➁ N2S24422U ➀➁ N2SC24421U ➀➁ N2SC24422U ➀➁ 1 4C 1 Diagram Marking Unless Otherwise Specified 2 2 1 Specify STARTSTOP (or Specify) 2 Selector Switches Position No. Pilot Lights* Pushbuttons 1 1 2 Two-Position, Two-Circuit 2 3 Markings Enclosure With Pilot Light, Pushbuttons and Selector Switch Hub Dead End Through Feed Size in. Volts Cat. # Cat. # /2 /4 120 N2S145211U ➀➁ N2S245211U ➀➁ N2SC145211U ➀➁ N2SC245211U ➀➁ /2 /4 240 N2S145212U ➀➁ N2S245212U ➀➁ N2SC145212U ➀➁ N2SC245212U ➀➁ /2 /4 120 N2S145231U ➀➁ N2S245231U ➀➁ N2SC145231U ➀➁ N2SC245231U ➀➁ /2 /4 240 N2S145232U ➀➁ N2S245232U ➀➁ N2SC145232U ➀➁ N2SC245232U ➀➁ 1 3 Specify 1 3 1 2 Three-Position, Two-Circuit 1 3 Specify 1 3 ➀ Specify lens color for each pilot light. As an example, N2S1231U with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231U-J1-J3 Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11 *Replacement switch for selector switches is Cat. No. ESWP126. †Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. 540 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 ➁ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Push Buttons: Selector Switches – Selector Switches – Two-Position: Three-Position: START FORWARD RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG STOP REVERSE HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO ON OPEN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV OFF CLOSE FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW RUN UP OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 JOG DOWN UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE TRIP IN ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN RESET OUT IN-OUT TEST RAISE RAISE-LOWER LIGHT ON LOWER START-STOP HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds N2FA and N2FAC Fire Alarm Stations Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Raintight Wet Locations Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant 4C Applications: 4C N2FA and N2FAC fire alarm stations are used: • As break-glass fire alarm stations • In conjunction with audible and/or visible signaling devices to alert personnel of a fire hazard • In Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D hazardous areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to an accident or abnormal operation • In damp, wet or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors in Division 2 areas of petroleum refineries, chemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist Features: • Factory sealed. External seals are not required. • Enclosures are made of Krydon® fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat and sunlight. • Highly visible molded-in red color for quick identification. • Break-glass rod is attached to station with a chain for ready access during an emergency. • Factory installed dead end (N2FA) or through feed (N2FAC) hubs – 1/2", 3/4" and 1" sizes. Ordering Information Hub Size Dead End Cat. # Through Feed Cat. # Replacement Glass Cat. # /2 3 /4 1 N2FA11 N2FA21 N2FA31 N2FAC11 N2FAC21 N2FAC31 DS K14 DS K14 DS K14 1 Dimensions* In Inches: Certifications and Compliances: • NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D • NEMA 3, 7BCD (Division 2), 12 *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. 1 /2" & 3/4" Hubs a b 11/8 11/16 1" Hubs a b 11/4 15/16 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 541 4C GHG43 Series Control Stations Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant UL/cUL listed Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, (A) Ex de IIB + H2 T6 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) PTB ATEX CERTIFIED 3117 Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2 Ex de IIC,T6 Zones 21 and 22 IP 66, NEMA 4X 4C Applications: Control stations are used as a remote means of: • Motor control • Visual indication of equipment performance • On-off control of circuits • Circuit selection Common applications include: • Areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts • For installation at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist Features: GHG43 Nonmetallic Control Stations • NEMA 4X, IP66 enclosure with formedin-place gasket • Available with all operators: indicator lights, potentiometers, control switches, pushbuttons, terminal blocks and meters • Base-mounted contact blocks • Easy change-out components snap in place on DIN rail • Enclosure meets UL 94-VO. Also available in anti-static Ex e materials • Inserts for mounting DIN rails • Available with a maximum of 2 entries top and bottom for conduit fittings or cable glands • Suitable for universal mounting plates on pipes, conduit, wall or channels • Mounting dimensions data molded on back • Captive, corrosion-resistant cover screws • Built-in mounting slots for wall installation • Available in 316L stainless steel GHG43 Stainless Steel Control Stations Certifications and Compliances: • • • • • • • • UL/cUL Listed Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) Class I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB + H2, T6 AEx de IIB + H2, T6 Type 3, 4, 4X; IP66 CENELEC-PTB 00 ATEX 3117 Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2, IP66 Options: Description Cooper Crouse-Hinds GHG43 Series control stations are now available with 316L stainless steel enclosures, making them ideal for corrosive and adverse locations especially offshore platform applications. 542 www.crouse-hinds.com Suffix S860 US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds How to build a GHG43 Series Catalog Number‡ GHG43 Series Control Stations 4C Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant GHG43 2 - Size 2 Enclosure Codes see page 545 4C Pushbutton DRT Codes see page 545 Double Pushbutton Mounting Area* GHG43 4 - Size 4 Enclosure Codes see page 545 Key Operated Pushbutton Codes see page 546 Mushroom-Head Pushbutton Codes see page 546 Mounting Area* Signal Lamp CHS Controls AB ‡For a GHG43 control station with 316L stainless steel enclosure, add suffix "S860" to end of catalog number. *Unoccupied spaces must be filled in with KLM for correct positioning of devices. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 543 4C GHG43 Series Control Stations How to build a GHG43 Series Catalog Number‡ Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Cable Entries NPT Metric No entries No entries 2 x 1/2" Myers Hub, STGK1 Zinc Gland plate 2 x M25 Plastic Cable gland M25 Blanking plug 4C Codes see page 547 Potentiometer Two entries Codes see page 548 Requires 2 spaces 2 x 3/4" Myers Hub, 2 x M20 STGK2 Zinc Gland Threaded entries plate Gland plate (Stainless Steel Control Stations only) Measuring Instrument One entry 2 x 1/2" Myers Hub, SSTGK1 Stainless steel Gland plate Codes see pages 549–550 2 x 3/4" Myers Hub, 1 x M32 Plastic SSTGK2 Stainless Cable gland steel Gland plate (Stainless Steel Control Stations only) Switch Codes see pages 549–550 Requires 2 spaces Control Switch Ex 23 10A Code see page 547 Terminals and cover blanking plug 1 x 3/4" Myers Hub, STGK2, Zone 1 Gland plate 1 x M25 Threaded Entry, Blanking plug and Gland plate 1 x 1/2" Myers Hub, STGK1, Zone 1 Gland plate 2 x M25 Threaded Entry, 1 blanking plug and Gland plate 1 x 1/2" Myers Hub, 1 x M20 SSTGK1 Stainless st. Threaded entry Gland plate Blanking plug and Gland plate CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 1 x 3/4" Myers Hub, 1 x 3/ 4" SSTGK2 Stainless st. Myers Hub Gland plate SSTGK2 stainless steel, Gland plate ‡For a GHG43 control station with 316L stainless steel enclosure, add suffix "S860" to end of catalog number. *Unoccupied spaces must be filled in with KLM for correct positioning of devices. 544 www.crouse-hinds.com 2 x M25 Threaded entries Gland plate US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Pushbuttons Technical Data GHG43 Series Control Stations 4C CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Pushbuttons: • Used for logic controls in hazardous areas • Single or double units • Used with all operators • Base mounting Pushbutton Ex de IIC T6 PTB No. Ex-87.B.1007U PTB, UL, cUL Up to 400V NEC/CEC 10A IEC 16 A 2 x 2.5mm2 / 14AWG >105 Operations Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Rated Voltage Rated Current Terminal Wiring Mechanical and Electrical Life See page 550 for explanation of contact symbols. Pushbutton DRT D R Code T O A B C D 4C Contact System Code B 13 14 Inscription ALL * 0 I II Stop Code C 01 02 03 04 06 Lockout see page 551 Code D (leave blank if no lockout required) 15 Start Special-Text On Order † 07 99 Double Pushbutton DDTO D D Code T Left Right E C D E O A B Contact System Code B 43 Inscription Code C, D Left/Right 44 ALL * 0 01 02 03 04 06 I II 45 Stop Start Special-Text on Order † 07 99 Lockout see page 551 Code E (leave blank if no lockout required) Key-Operated Pushbutton SLT S Code L T O A B C Contact System Code B 23 Pushbutton Not Depressed Key Depressed 24 25 Lockable Key Removable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Lockable Key Removable Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Auto Yes Yes Yes 1 2 3 4 5 6 Code C * 01 - Includes the following discs - Start, stop, I, O, and red, green, yellow, white and black blank discs. † For Marking Guide for Pushbuttons see page 551. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 545 GHG43 Series Control Stations 4C Pushbuttons and Signal Lamps Technical Data Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Mushroom-Head Pushbutton SGT S G Code T A B C D E F 4C Contact System Code B 53 54 55 Color of Pushbutton Code C Red Yellow Black Actuator 1 2 3 Function Code D Spring Return Maintained Key Release 1 2 3 Inscription Code E Stop Start Black Actuator 06 07 11 Lockout see page 551 Code F (leave blank if no lockout required) Signal Lamp Lamp • Used for positive feedback indication • High intensity with special reflector and optical lens • Accomodates most input voltages • Base mounting Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Lamp Life Ex de IIC T6 PTB No. Ex-88.B.2106U PTB, UL, cUL >100,000 Hours (11.5 Years) Up to 240VAC, 50 / 60 Hz Up to 110VDC Max. 15 mA <1.2W 2 x 2.5mm2 / 14AWG Red, Green, Yellow, Clear & Blue Rated Voltages Rated Current Power Consumption Terminal Wiring Colors Signal Lamp SIL S Code I L A Colored Lens Cover White Code B 1 Voltage Code C B C Yellow Red 1 pkg white, yellow, red, green Green 2 3 4 5 20-250VAC/DC 10-33VAC/DC 01 31 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 546 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Blue 6 GHG43 Series Control Stations 4C Terminal Blocks and Potentiometers Technical Data Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Terminal Blocks • Terminal block for easy field connections • Base mounting Terminal Blocks Ex e II PTB No. Ex-88.B.3112U Up to 400V 23A 4mm2 / 12AWG Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Rated Voltages Rated Current Conductor Size Terminals and Cover Plugs KLM K Code M A B 6 Terminals 2 x 4 mm2 Undrilled Cover (No Terminals) 61 00 Potentiometers • Used to adjust resistance to vary motor speed or light levels • Scale 0 to 100% • Base mounting 4C Code B L Potentiometers Ex de IIC T6 PTB No. Ex-87.B.1007U PTB, UL, cUL >250V 1.0W 100–10,000W 270° 0–100% 2 x 2.5mm2 / 14AWG Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Rated Voltages Power Consumption Resistance Angle of Rotation Scale Connection Terminals Potentiometer POT P Code O T A Power Consumption Resistance W Code B B 1W 1,000 4 2,200 7 4,700 5 10,000 6 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 547 Ammeters Technical Data GHG43 Series Control Stations 4C Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Ammeters 4C • Used to measure motor current draw for efficiencies and maintenance • Slide in scales to accommodate any amperage range • Red indicator for quick visual indication to compare set points and actual values Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Ammeters Ex e II T6 PTB No. Ex-87.B.2016U Approvals PTB, UL, cUL Movement Moving iron (core) Accuracy 2.5% of range (class 2.5) Measuring Range 0-16A direct, C.T. n/1 A Operating Position Vertical Scale Interchangeable for C.T. n/1 A Zero Adjustment At instrument Terminal Wiring 2 x 2.5 mm2 / 14 AWG Rated Current Marking Red indicator Ammeter Measuring Instrument AM 72* M 7 Code 2 A B C Movement Direct n/1 A 0 - 2 mA Code B 1 2 3 Movements 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA are only available with 0 - 100 / 120% scale Direct Measurement Code C Scale Interchangeable Scale for C.T. n/1A Code C Scale Code C 02 03 04 05 07 02 03 04 05 06 08 0 0 0 0 0 -1/1.5A - 2.5/3.75A -5/7.5A - 10/15A - 16/24A 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1/1.5A - 2.5/3.75A -5/7.5A - 10/15A -15/22.5A - 20/30A 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 4-20 mA 6 Scale Code C Scale 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 30/45A - 40/60A - 50/75A - 60/90A -75/112.5A - 100/150A - 150/225A - 200/300A 250/375A 300/450A 400/600A 500/750A 600/900A 100/150A * Requires 2 spaces. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 548 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds GHG43 Series Control Stations 4C Rotary Switches Technical Data CHS Controls AB Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Rotary Control Switches • Used for selectable operations (i.e. Hand–Off–Auto) • 2 independent contacts • Available in any contact configuration • Spring return or maintained position • Available with lockout positions SCT Ex de IIC T6 Ex.87.B.1007U PTB, UL, cUL 400 V NEC 10 A IEC 16 A 2 x 2.5mm2 / 14 AWG >105 Operations >105 Operations AC II: 20V/6A 400V/4A DC II: 24V/6A 60V/0.8A 110V/.5A 220V/.2A Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Rated Votage Rated Current Terminal Wiring Mechanical Life Electrical Life Switching Capacity 4C Ex 23 Ex de IIC T6 PTB no. Ex-88.B.1047U PTB, UL, cUL Up to 500 V NEC 10 A IEC 16 A 2 x 2.5mm2 / 14 AWG >105 Operations >105 Operations AC I: 500G/10A AC II: 230V/6A 500V/6A DC II: 24V/6A 48V/4A 60V/0.8A 110V/0.5A 220V/0.4A Rotary Control Switch SCT S C Code T A B C D Switch Mechanism Code B Code C 01 03 04 06 29 Same as SCT above except up to 4 independent contacts Inscription 0 STOP HAND REMOTE OFF I START AUTO LOCAL ON Code C Inscription 07 13 14 15 99 I LOCAL STOP HAND Special – text 0 II REMOTE AUTO 0 START 0 AUTO to be given on order Contact System Code D 1 2 3 4 5 6 Rotary Control Switch Ex 23* E Code Code B 01 03 04 06 07 13 14 23 24 27 29 32 99 x 2 A 3 B C D E Inscription 0 I STOP START HAND AUTO remote local I 0 LOCAL REMOTE STOP 0 OFF 0 HAND OFF START STOP OFF ON ON OFF Special – text to be given on order AUTO START ON AUTO * Requires 2 spaces in cover. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 549 4C GHG43 Series Control Stations Rotary Switches Technical Data Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Type Code C 00 2 Position 09 3 Position 01 2 Position 10 3 Position 02 2 Position 12 3 Position 03 Single Pole Changeover 13 2 Position 05 HOA 14 2 Position 07 3 Position Single Level 15 3 Position Double Pole Changeover 4C Code C Contact System Contact System Type Switched Mechanism Code D Padlocking Facility Code E Contact Configurations Normally Closed Normally Open Normally Closed Extended Over 2 Positions Normally Open Early Make/Late Break Change-Over Break Before Make Change-Over Make Before Break Example of Switch Type 10 This example is the switch type 10 Stop-Run-Stop. The switch has 3 positions – the normal position is center and can be switched left or right. An arrow (→←) indicates spring return. (See codes for switch mechanism). Contacts 1–2 only close in the Stop position. Contacts 3–4 close only in the Start position. Contacts 5–6 are normally closed and remain closed when switched to the Start position and open when switched to the Stop position. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 550 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds GHG43 Series Control Stations Lockouts for Pushbuttons and Marking Guide for Pushbuttons 4C Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Lockouts for DRTO Pushbuttons X Code D Shroud Cover For Pushbutton Y-Lockout with bolt and chain Z Code D Padlocking Fire Alarm Cover For Pushbutton Lockouts for DDTO Double Pushbuttons Z Code E Padlocking Cover For Double Pushbutton With Hole 4C X Code ED Padlocking Cover For Double Pushbutton Without Hole Lockouts for SGT Mushroom-Head Pushbuttons X Code F Padlocking Cover For Emergency Stop Pushbutton Z Code F Padlocking Cover For Emergency Stop Pushbutton With Bolt & Chain Marking Guide For Pushbuttons Special Text Marking Required Acknowledge Alarm Automatic Close Down Standard Abbreviation AK AM AU CL DN Actual Marking on Disc ACK ALARM AUTO CLOSE DOWN Fast Forward Hand High In Jog FS FW HN HI IN JG FAST FWD HAND HIGH IN JOG Local Lower Maintain Manual Normal Off LC LO MT MN NR OF LOCAL LOWER MAINT MANUAL NORMAL OFF On Open Out Raise Remote Reset ON OP OT RA RM RS ON OPEN OUT RAISE REMOTE RESET Reverse Run Slow Test Trip Up RV RN SL TT TP UP REV RUN SLOW TEST TRIP UP www.crouse-hinds.com CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 551 4C GHG43 Series Control Stations Dimensions CHS Controls AB Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 4C GHG43 Nonmetallic Control Stations End View of Back Box GHG43 Size 4 Nonmetallic GHG43 Size 2 Nonmetallic GHG43 Stainless Steel Control Stations Box Type Dimension (inches) A B C D E F G H J K L M 1 Operator Control Station 4.72 4.72 4.96 4.96 3.60 3.94 3.94 3.15 2.76 0.79 2.36 2.36 2 Operator Control Station 6.69 4.72 6.93 4.96 3.60 5.90 3.94 5.12 2.76 0.79 4.33 2.36 3 Operator Control Station 8.66 4.72 8.90 4.96 3.60 7.87 3.94 7.09 2.76 0.79 6.30 2.36 4 Operator Control Station 10.63 4.72 10.87 4.96 3.60 9.84 3.94 9.06 2.76 0.79 8.27 2.36 552 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds OAC Series Pushbutton Stations and Heavy Duty Selector Switches 600 VAC Standard Factory Sealed† Applications: Features: • Water-shedding construction with female threaded bottom opening and male threaded cover • Threaded cover is deep dome type, which surrounds the enclosed device • All enclosures are suitable for hazardous area use • Pushbutton stations have a guarded rocker type operating handle at the front arranged for padlocking to prevent unauthorized operation • Selector switches have a lever type operating handle at the top • Provided with vertical through feed conduit hubs of sizes indicated in the listings • Units are factory sealed for Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D • Standard lockout on selector switches. Locks two or three-position switch handle in any position. Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 4C Certifications and Compliances: • NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7ABCD, 9EFG, 12 • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Electrical Rating Ranges: • Pushbutton stations, and selector switches - Air Break – heavy duty 600VAC maximum 4C OAC Units are used: • In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts • In damp, wet or corrosive locations • Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist • In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of acetylene and hydrogen, or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard such as manufactured gas • In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7ABCD, 9EFG, 12 Options: The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Back boss drilled and tapped for 3/4" and 1" sizes........................................................ Specify Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counter-clockwise operation.................................................. S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation............................................................... S635 Dimensions In Inches*: Standard Materials: OAC • Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy • Covers and operating handle – copper-free aluminum • Operating shafts – stainless steel OAC (91 Series only) Standard Finishes: Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Stainless steel – natural CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se †Factory sealed for Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D. *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. For cover removal, add 21/2" to dimension. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 553 4C OAC Series Pushbutton Stations and Heavy Duty Selector Switches 600 VAC Standard Factory Sealed† 4C Ordering Information - Pushbutton Stations Normal Pos. 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits Universal Oper. Handles 2 Circuits* Single Replacement ED21 Pushbuttons Diagram Double Single Operating Both Buttons Double ED22 ED22 Hub Size Cat. # Cat. # /4 1 OAC2101 ➀ OAC2133 ➀ OAC2139 ➀ OAC2103 ➀ OAC3101 ➀ OAC3133 ➀ OAC3139 ➀ OAC3103 ➀ 3 ED22* Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7ABCD, 9EFG, 12 With momentary left handle and maintained right handle. For momentary "START", maintained "STOP" and similar applications. Normal Pos. Diagram 2 Circuit Universal Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Size Cat. # /4 1 3 Cat. # Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight OAC2291 ➀ OAC3291 ➀ Cat. # ➀ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET LIGHT ON START RUN TRIP HAND STOP JOG TEST AUTOMATIC ON OPEN DOWN RAISE EMERGENCY CLOSE IN LOWER FORWARD UP OUT REVERSE †Factory sealed for Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D *Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, one normally open and one normally closed. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 554 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds OAC Series Pushbutton Stations and Heavy Duty Selector Switches 600 VAC Standard Factory Sealed† Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7ABCD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 4C Ordering Information - Selector Switches Style Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 TwoPosition, TwoCircuit Replacement Contact Blocks* Enclosure with Selector Switch Hub Size Cat. # /4 1 OAC2471 ➀ OAC3471 ➀ /4 1 OAC2472 ➀ OAC3472 ➀ 3 ED21 3 TwoPosition, FourCircuit ED22 ED21 OAC2473 ➀ OAC3473 ➀ /4 1 OAC2474 ➀ OAC3474 ➀ /4 1 OAC2475 ➀ OAC3475 ➀ 3 ED22 ThreePosition, FourCircuit ‡ 3 ED22 ➀ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Two-Position FAST, SLOW IN-OUT RUN, JOG OPEN, CLOSE RAISE-LOWER HAND, AUTOMATIC UP,DOWN START-STOP FORWARD, REVERSE ON, OFF Three-Position RUN, OFF, JOG HAND, OFF, AUTOMATIC FORWARD, OFF, REVERSE FAST, OFF, SLOW Dimensions* In Inches: 1, OFF, 2 OPEN, OFF, CLOSE UP, OFF, DOWN CHS Controls AB †Factory sealed for Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D ‡ Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See page 553 for explanation of options. *Dimensions are approximate. Not for construction purposes. For cover removal, add 21/2" to dimension. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 555 4C /4 1 3 ThreePosition, TwoCircuit ‡ OAC Selector Switches are furnished with pushbutton contact blocks, cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below. 4C CHS Controls AB Control Station Covers Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 4C Hinged and Open Front Open Front Cover Hinged Cover Applications: Hinged Covers Added environmental protection for Cooper Crouse-Hinds control stations is now available from a patented "slip on" series of covers. Easy to install, these enclosures are available in hinged and open front styles, and are ideal for corrosive and adverse areas where product endurance is essential. Secured Access Hinged Cover • High moisture areas due to weather, steam, or wash down procedures. • Areas where dirt, dust, mud, sand, etc. interferes with equipment operation. • Prevention of accidental equipment operation. • Instances requiring equipment lock out/tag out. Quick Access Open Front Cover • Areas requiring quick access to control device. • Areas of high moisture from weather or dripping liquid. • Prevention of accidental equipment operation. • Areas with possible damage from bumping or banging. Single Gang Application EDS(C) and EFD(C) control stations EFS(C) control stations MC(C) control stations FS(C) back box with cover assembly FD(C) back box with cover assembly EGF11 and EGF12 (Ground Fault) N2S(C) Krydon: 1 & 2 devices N2D(C) Krydon: 1 & 2 devices GHG432 control station Cat. # NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 Single Gang (Long) Application EFD(C) (3 device) N2S(C) Krydon: 3 devices N2S(C) Krydon: 4 devices Cat. # NC CH1 3L NC CH1 N2S 3L NC CH1 N2S 4L Double Gang Application EDS(C) control stations EDSCM32: 2 gang tandem EDSCM33: 3 gang tandem FS(C) back box with cover FD(C) back box with cover EDSC378 - 3 gang tandem assembly Cat. # NC CH2 NC CH2L NC CH3L NC CH2 FS NC CH2 FD NC CH1 MC3 Features and Benefits: • Clear UV stabilized Lexan polycarbonate plastic allows the enduser to see enclosed controls and is strong enough to withstand the rough treatment found in the industrial work place. • Downtime due to weather or accidental bumping is eliminated and plant shutdowns caused by inoperable or accidentally operated pushbutton devices are non-existent. • Lock out/tag out capabilities conform to OSHA requirements and provides increased personnel safety. • Quick and easy slip on installation requires no tools or interruption of service. • Hinged cover provides superior sealing through heavy-duty neoprene gaskets. • Colored covers are available (e.g. red for emergency, yellow for fire alarm, etc.). • Specific chemical resistant covers available (may not be clear) consult factory for minimum order quantity. • Capability to engineer cover to fit any size device - consult factory. EFS MC FS FD EGF 11 N2S N2D GHG Open Front Covers Single Gang Application EDS(C) and EFD(C) control stations EFS(C) control stations MC(C) control stations FS(C) back box with cover assembly FD(C) back box with cover assembly EGF11 and EGF12 (Ground Fault) N2S(C) Krydon: 2 device assembly N2D(C) Krydon: 3 device assembly Cat. # NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 Single Gang (Long) Application EFD(C): 3 device control stations N2S(C) Krydon: 3 device assembly N2S(C) Krydon: 4 device assembly Cat. # NC CH1 3L QA NC CH1 N2S 3L QA NC CH1 N2S 4L QA Double Gang Application EDS(C) control stations EDSCM32: 2 gang tandem EDSCM 33: 3 gang tandem FS(C) back box with cover assembly FD(C) back box with cover assembly Cat. # NC CH2 QA NC CH2L QA NC CH3L QA NC CH2 FS QA NC CH2 FD QA QA EFS QA MC QA FS QA FD QA EGF QA N2S QA N2D QA Custom covers can be supplied but must be accompanied by either a sample of the device to be covered or a copy of a drawing with all actual measurements of the device to be covered. Covers can also be color-coded. Consult factory. 556 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 4C Replacements for Pushbutton and Selector Switch Control Stations CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 600 VAC Heavy Duty ED Series Pushbutton Contacts* Complete with Mounting Strap and Hardware 4C 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits 1 Open - A 1 Closed - B Where Used Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # MC, EDS and EFS pushbutton stations and selector switches OAC pushbutton stations and selector switches EWC pushbutton stations EMP pushbutton stations EMP selector switches EFD factory sealed pushbutton stations and selector switches (M90) DSD962 pushbutton cover ED11 ED21 ED12† ED22† ED32† ED35 ED35 ED12† ED12† ED22† ED32† ED38 ED38 ED11 3 Circuits Universal ED12† ED13 Contact Ratings Max. Current (Amperes) Volts Make Break 600 VAC Heavy Duty (NEMA 120 60 6.0 240 30 3.0 480 15 1.5 600 12 1.2 Direct Current (NEMA P150) 125 1.1 1.1 Voltamperes Make Break A600) 7200 720 7200 720 7200 720 7200 720 138 138 Continuous Current (Amperes) Contact Block Only (less strap) Description Cat. # Contact Block ESWP126 10 10 10 10 5 External Operating Buttons CF859 CF705 Where Used Colors Available MC, EFS, and EFD – current design with nylon guards Cat. # Red, Green, Black CF859 K1 ➀ EMPS019, EMP019, EMPS029 and EMP029 – single operator FS, EFS, and EFD – previous design with aluminum guards Red, Green, Black CF705-K1 ➀ ➀ If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET LIGHT ON START RUN TRIP HAND STOP JOG TEST AUTOMATIC ON EMERGENCY OPEN FORWARD CLOSE REVERSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER * ESWP126 is the contact block without the mounting strap. † Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, with one normally open and one normally closed. ‡ Use CF705-K1 for DEV11 and DEV12. To order DL legend plates see page 502 for markings. Note: CF859-K1 and CF705-K1 come with 5 buttons. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 557 4C CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 558 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Specialty Control Stations Hazardous and Non-hazardous 5C Description Page No. Controls for Bulk Solids Handling see page 573 see page 572 AFA / AFAX Conveyor Alignment Switches AFU / AFUX Conveyor Control Safety Switches Custom Control Panels see pages 560–567 EJB Series Ground Fault Control Stations see page 579 EGF Series Grounding Indication / Control see page 571 EGL Series 5C Mine Signal Switches see page 574 AFU Series Pendant Pushbutton Stations see pages 577–578 see pages 575–576 FLEXITITE™ Series FLEXITITE™ D2X Series Pushbuttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches see page 568 EMP Series CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 559 5C EJB Custom-Built Control Panels Globally Certified—Individually Customized The following pages will assist you in choosing the combination of features suited to your needs and requirements. The easy, five-step process will take you through the specification of cover openings, specifying devices, drilled and tapped conduit openings, device locations, and legend and nameplate selection. After filling out your separate order form for each panel, fax it to your local Cooper Crouse-Hinds Distributor. Please consult the factory for alternatives not detailed in these pages, such as other conduit arrangements, terminal blocks, or circuit breaker operating handles. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III UL and cUL approved Ex d IIB + H2 T6 Certified to ATEX Directive† NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG IP66 Applications: • Manufactured for hazardous environments, the EJB Custom-Built Control Panel is an explosionproof enclosure built to customer specific requirements • Available in a variety of sizes with an unlimited combination of devices, windows, and markings, these panels are designed to maximize the efficiency of each unique process Features: • The foundation of the Custom-Built Control Panel is our tried and tested copper-free aluminum EJB enclosure. This corrosion resistant, heavy-duty enclosure features bolted construction, stainless steel hinges, and flexible tap-in mounting feet. 5C Tap-in mounting feet offer a simple and secure way to mount enclosure, and are replaceable if broken or lost Neoprene cover gasket—between body and cover—provides NEMA 4, IP66 watertight seal Captive, quick-release stainless steel triple-lead cover bolts make it easier to get in and out of the enclosure Optional GUB explosionproof glass window is available when you need to see inside Stainless steel hinges Internal and external ground terminations simplify grounding requirements Internal mounting plate standard EMP Series— the most complete line of devices in the industry • pilot lights • pushbuttons • selector switches • potentiometers NPT or metric entries available Copper-free aluminum construction available with Corro-free™ epoxy powder coat for additional protection in corrosive atmospheres Optional individual device markings to clearly indicate the function of each device Optional engraved nameplates May be added in the field Certifications and Compliances: ATEX Certifications EJB Custom Control Panels • EJB Enclosure with Conduit Entries & Device Holes • NEC/CEC: Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups B*, C and D Class I, Zones 1 & 2 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G Class III • NEMA: 3, 4, 7B*CD, 9EFG • cUL to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 30—C22.2 No. 25 Cl. II (E, F, G) • Ex d IIB + H2 T6 • UL Standard 1203 • IP66 • Certified to the ATEX Directive when ordered with -ATEX suffix. • Custom Control Panel is component certified only. For assembly certification, please consult factory. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 Certificate #: ITS08ATEX15797U • EMP Devices II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15652U • GUB0108 ATEX Window II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15638U • ECD Breather/Drain II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 CHS Controls AB Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15639U Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se *Groups C and D only when ordered with GUB window. † Certified to the ATEX Directive when ordered with ATEX suffix. 560 II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EJB Custom-Built Control Panels Ordering Information— Building a Custom Solution 5C Globally Certified—Individually Customized 5C CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 561 5C EJB Custom-Built Control Panels Ordering Information— Building a Custom Solution 5C Globally Certified—Individually Customized CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 562 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EJB Custom-Built Control Panels Ordering Information— Building a Custom Solution 5C Globally Certified—Individually Customized 5C CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 563 5C EJB Custom-Built Control Panels Ordering Information— Building a Custom Solution 5C Globally Certified—Individually Customized CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 564 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EJB Custom-Built Control Panels 5C Order Form CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Globally Certified—Individually Customized 5C www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 565 5C EJB Custom-Built Control Panels Order Form 5C Globally Certified—Individually Customized CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 566 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Order Form EJB Custom-Built Control Panels 5C CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Globally Certified—Individually Customized Section 2 Completed Catalog Number: Specify the complete catalog number including conduit designations. Distributor: Contact: Customer: Phone Number: CROUSE-HINDS FACTORY USE ONLY Catalog Number Entered: Reference #: B# OPTIONS All Cooper Crouse-Hinds Custom-Built Control Panels are provided with a mounting plate and hinges. Hinges are on left side of enclosure. If you desire hinges on one of the other sides, circle choice here: TOP RIGHT BOTTOM For any of the following options, check here: ____ ATEX Certified (ATEX) ____ Breather and Drain (S756V) ____ Epoxy finish, external (S752) ____ Epoxy finish, internal and external (S753) Section 3—Exterior Front View size 1 Location of Devices and Windows in Cover: Outline the cover space available, beginning in the upper left corner of the grid, based upon the EJB selected. See Table 1 for device layout. 2 3 4 5 Top (column) 6 7 8 9 10 11 5C EJB__________________________________ 12 13 A B C size D Section 4 Device Markings: Indicate by row and column position markings/legends for each device. F Right Side Left Side (Hinge Side) (row) E G H I Engraved Plate: Specify markings for each nameplate based upon the following: Maximum Number of Characters/Line J K L Marking Size 1/8" 3/16" 1/4" 1/2" Number of Characters 36 24 18 9 M Bottom Note: All device openings are spaced 2.62" center to center. Specify Row Column Device Marking (DSL) or Engraved Plate Line 1 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 Engraved Plate Line 2 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Marking Size 567 EMP and EMPS Barrel Assemblies 5C As indicated in the listings, certain barrel assemblies are the same as those used in complete EMP units and may be utilized as replacements. Single pushbutton Double pushbutton, single operator The remainder are primarily for use with hazardous area boxes to assemble special control stations. For additional information, see page 560 describing custom-built control panels. Diagram 5C Certifications and Compliances: • • • • • • • • Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard 1203 CSA Standard C22.2 No 30 CENELEC ATEX Certificate ITS07 ATEX 15652U Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2, T5 Short Cat. # Standard Cat. # EMPS019 ➁ EMP019 ➁ EMPS029 ➁ EMP029 ➁ Double pushbutton, double operator Diagram Short Assembly Cat. # Standard Assembly Cat. # EMPS039 ➁ EMP039 ➁ Two-position selector switch Ordering Information: Short Assembly Cat. # Standard Assembly Cat. # EMPS049 ➁ EMP049 ➁ EMPS059 ➁ EMP059 ➁ Select the Cat. No. from the listings. For pilot lights and illuminated pushbuttons, specify color of jewel using symbols from the table below. For pushbuttons and selector switches, optional markings may be specified in the tables below. Diagram Position 1 Group 1: Three-position selector switch Standard assemblies are for replacement in complete EMP units or for custom-built control panels. Short assemblies are for custom-built control panels only. Both assemblies may be used with System 4 Control Stations. Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations NEMA 3, 7BCD, 9EFG Diagram Position 1 Position 2 Position 2 Position 3 Pilot light‡ Short Assembly Cat. # Standard Assembly ✠ Cat. # EMPS069 ➁ EMP069 ➁ EMPS079 ➁ EMP079 ➁ EMPS089 ➁ EMP089 ➁ ➀Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red J1 Clear J10 Green J3 Blue J11 Amber J6 Standard Assembly Cat. # Diagram (120V)* EMP009 ➀ ➁If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Push Button Station Marking START STOP ON OFF RESET RUN TRIP JOG TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER ‡ LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED to end of catalog number after last color symbol. * Other voltages available. Consult factory. For 24 VDC operation, add suffix S300. ✠ The following suffixes may be used with these catalog numbers: S634 - Momentary contact clockwise, spring return to center; S635 - Momentary contact counter-clockwise, spring return to center. CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 568 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EMP and EMPS Barrel Assemblies Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2, T5 Group 2: For custom-built control panels. Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations NEMA 3, 7BCD, 9EFG 5C Maintained Contact Pushbutton Illuminated pushbutton‡ Up Diagram Down Long Assembly Cat. # EMP098 ➁ Diagram 120V pilot light EMP0090 ➀ 120V pilot light EMP0098 ➀ ➀Add color Color Red Green Amber Clear Blue J10 J11 Push Button Station Marking START STOP ON Diagram Position 2 J1 J3 J6 ➁If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Two-position selector switch, key operated Position 1 symbol for each pilot light from table below. Symbol Color Symbol 5C Long Assembly Cat. # OFF RESET RUN TRIP JOG TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC Key Removal Short Assembly Cat. # Standard Assembly Cat. # Both positions Left only Right only EMPS0491 ➁ EMPS0492 ➁ EMPS0493 ➁ EMP0491 ➁ EMP0492 ➁ EMP0493 ➁ Both positions Left only Right only EMPS0591 ➁ EMPS0592 ➁ EMPS0593 ➁ EMP0591 ➁ EMP0592 ➁ EMP0593 ➁ EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER Three-position selector switch, key operated Diagram Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Key Removal Short Assembly Cat. # Standard Assembly Cat. # ✠ All Center only Left only Right only EMPS0691 EMPS0692 EMPS0693 EMPS0694 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ EMP0691 EMP0692 EMP0693 EMP0694 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ All Center only Left only Right only EMPS0791 EMPS0792 EMPS0793 EMPS0794 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ EMP0791 EMP0792 EMP0793 EMP0794 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ All Center only Left only Right only EMPS0891 EMPS0892 EMPS0893 EMPS0894 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ EMP0891 EMP0892 EMP0893 EMP0894 ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ ‡ LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED to end of catalog number after last color symbol. ✠ The following suffixes may be used with these catalog numbers: S634 - Momentary contact clockwise, spring return to center; S635 - Momentary contact counter-clockwise, spring return to center. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 569 5C EMP and EMPS Barrel Assemblies CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2, T5 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations NEMA 3, 7BCD, 9EFG Dimensions* In Inches: 5C EMP-EMPS029 EMP009 EMP-EMPS019 EMP-EMPS039 EMP098 EMP0090 EMP-EMPS0491, 0591, 0691, 0791, 0891 Series EMP0098 *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. EMP-EMPS049, 059, 069, 079, 089 All barrel assemblies are 3/4"-14 NPSM thread size. 570 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds EGL Static Grounding Indicator With Automated Pump Control and Static Ground Verification System Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2 IIB + H2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III UL/cUL Listed NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight / Wet Locations 5C Applications: EGL Static Grounding Indicator is the ideal product for safe loading/unloading of ethanol, biofuel, petroleum, chemicals, plastics and other combustible materials. The EGL is mounted adjacent to loading/unloading areas and connected to transportation tank vehicles, railcars, drums or other portable containers to prevent explosions due to static discharge during product transfer by providing: • A ground path for static build-up • Automatic pump shutdown when static grounding circuit is broken • Visual indication of safe, static grounding before, during and after loading and unloading operations Features and Benefits: Certifications & Compliances: • Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups • Class I, Zone 1&2 IIB + H2 B, C, D • Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G • UL/cUL Listed • Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G • IP 65 • Class III • NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 5C • Static ground verification system provides ground path for static build-up to ensure safe product transfer • Integrated control relay allows for safe control of electrically operated pumps or valves, and for energizing remote indicators • Stainless steel clamp for grounding connection provides industrial durability, corrosion resistance, and increased product lifetime • Interior and exterior epoxy powdered paint finish provides superior corrosion resistance inside and out • LED pilot lights provide long-lasting visual identification of status of ground connection • ECD Type 4X drain protects interior equipment from environmental moisture and condensation, rain water, and hose-down applications • NEMA 4X compact, hose-tight, and corrosion-resistant enclosure offers years of service in harsh industrial environments • 25 ft. safety fluorescent yellow cord is easily identifiable to ensure safety and reduce tripping hazard • Neoprene cover gasket provides a watertight seal to meet UL Type 4 (NEMA 4) requirements • Stainless steel hinges are corrosion resistant while providing safe and easy access to interior of enclosure • Waterguard™ desiccant packet absorbs and removes water/moisture and protects the enclosed equipment when not energized • Adjustable mounting feet provide ease of mounting during installation Ordering Information Description Indicator with two pilot lights* Catalog Number EGL210-J1-J3 * Includes one red and one green pilot light Options: Description Internal space heaters to limit condensation build-up Transformer suitable for both 220/240VAC or 440/480VAC applications 50 foot cord Suffix R11 S883 50FC Options: Replacement Parts: Ground clamp Ground clamp assembly (includes 25 ft. cord, connector and clamp) EGL210 universal interior replacement kit Pilot lights (Red) Pilot lights (Green) Mounting feet Transformer (220/240VAC; 440/480VAC) Space heater Pilot light plug kit EGL-K1 EGL:20109-B EGL210-R1 EMP009-J1-LED EMP009-J3-LED EJB-KIT5 EGL S883 KIT EGL R11 KIT EGL PLUG KIT Weight & Dimensions: EGL Assembly: Weight = 32 lbs (14.5 kg) Dimensions = inches (centimeters) Standard Materials: • Enclosure: Copper-free aluminum with interior and exterior epoxy powder coat • Clamp: Stainless steel • Clamp Grips: Polyvinylchloride dipped • Gasket: Neoprene 11.07 (28.12) 3/8" (0.95) DIAMETER BOLT 12.80 (32.51) 11.13 (28.27) Electrical Rating Ranges: • • • • 120-volt AC supply Control relay interlocking contact: 15A at 277VAC; 10A at 600VAC Dual-tapped 240 and 480 VAC Step Down Transformer available Provides 4k ohms or less switching impedance 5.00 (12.70) CL 1" (2.54) CONDUIT ENTRY WITH 3/4" (1.91) REDUCER 8.41 6.30 (21.36) (16.00) 3.00 (7.62) 1.75 (4.45) www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 571 5C AFU and AFUX Conveyor Belt Control Switch Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 5C Applications: AFU and AFUX conveyor control switches are used: • As emergency or normal "STOP" switch for conveyor lines, cranes, unloaders, bulk handling systems and similar equipment • In steel mills, mining and ore and coal handling operations, automotive and other assembly lines, warehouses, loading docks and various process industry facilities • In the control circuit of magnetic motor starters to shut down motor-driven conveyors or other machinery when switch is actuated AFU series complies with requirements for use in Class II areas having combustible dusts that may or may not be electrically conductive. AFU series are also gasketed for use in hosedown areas even when combustible dusts are present. AFUX series complies with requirements for use in NEC Class I areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases. AFUX series also complies with requirements for use in NEC Class I areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases. AFUX series also complies with NEC requirements for use in Class II hazardous areas, or for use in NEC hazardous areas classified simultaneously as Class I and Class II. Certifications and Compliances: Standard Finishes: • Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Steel – electrogalvanized with chromate finish (red acrylic paint on indicating arm) • Bronze – natural AFU Series • NEC/CEC: Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • Encl. 3, 5 • NEMA: 3, 4, 9EFG • IP66 • UL Standard: 698 • CSA Standard: 22.2 No. 30 AFUX Series • NEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA: 3, 7CD, 9EFG • IP65 • UL Standard: 698 • cUL Options: Description Finish: Corro-free™ epoxy powder coat – for coating outside only. Suffix S752 Electrical Rating: • Control circuit switch – 15 AMP, 600 VAC max. Standard Materials: • • • • Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations AFU0333-50 Single end left Enclosure – Feraloy® iron alloy Plunger – stainless steel Loop – bronze Indicating arm – steel Features: • Furnished with one or two end units, each containing 2-NO and 2-NC contact arrangements. • Precision switches provide maintained contact (switches have a snap action mechanism). • Enclosure has three 1" conduit hubs – two for horizontal through feed and one at the bottom. Cast mounting lugs on 11/ 2" centers permit attachment to the web of a standard 3" angle iron. • In installation, the actuating line or cable is connected from a fixed point to the loop on the end unit. A pull on the line of the required operating force and with a total movement of 1/2" actuates the plunger, opens the switch and trips the red painted indicating arm forward, which locks the plunger in the actuated (switch open) position. Returning the indicating arm to its normal position resets the mechanism. A typical installation would include single end switch units at each end of the conveyor with double end switch units between. • Depending on the size and length of line, supports at properly spaced intervals may be necessary to ensure that the line or cable weight alone will not actuate switch. 572 www.crouse-hinds.com AFU0333-66 Double end Ordering Information Description Maximum Weight of Unsupported Line or Cable Without Actuating Switch† (lbs.) Total Operating Force Required (lbs.) Contact Arrangements With 2-NO, 2-NC in Each End Unit Cat. # Cat. # Single end left Single end left Single end right Single end right Double end Double end 15 25 15 25 15 25 25 50 25 50 25 50 AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 †A galvanized steel aircraft cable, supported every 10' is recommended. Dimensions In Inches*: US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 50 60 05 06 55 66 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 50 60 05 06 55 66 AFA and AFAX Conveyor Belt Alignment Switch CHS Controls AB Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Applications: Features: • Furnished with precision switches that provide normally open and normally closed contacts (switches have a snap action mechanism). • Housing consists of a center section which can be mounted either vertically or horizontally, and a switch housing with an attached switch operating arm. • Enclosure has three 1" conduit hubs. Cast mounting lugs on 11/2" center permit attachment to the web of a standard 3" angle iron. • Operating arm has 31/2" long stainless steel protective roller. Approximately 3/4" lateral movement of operating arm actuates switch. • Spring loaded operating arm will automatically return switch to normal position when belt interference is removed. • A severe conveyor belt run-off can rotate the operating arm counter-clockwise up to 85 degrees without damage to the switch mechanism. • Installation of AFA or AFAX unit on either side of a conveyor belt allows approximately 1" or a predetermined allowable belt misalignment before switch is actuated. A typical installation would include a pair of AFA or AFAX units at each end of the conveyor belt where belt returns. Certifications and Compliances: AFA SERIES • NEC/CEC: Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA: 3, 4, 9EFG • IP66 • UL Standard: 698 • CSA C22.2 No. 25 AFAX SERIES • NEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA: 3, 7CD, 9EFG • IP65 • UL Standard: 1203 5C AFA, AFAX conveyor belt alignment switches are used: • As emergency or normal "STOP" switch for conveyor belts whenever they become misaligned or run off their tracks due to excessive speed, uneven load, leveling, breakage and/or other problems. • In steel mills, mining and ore and coal handling operations, automotive and other assembly lines, warehouses, loading docks, grain loading and handling facilities, and various other bulk handling operations. • In the control circuit of magnetic motor starters to shut down motor-driven conveyors in case of abnormal belt misalignment or run-off. AFA series complies with requirements for use in Class II areas having combustible dusts that may or may not be electrically conductive. AFA series are also gasketed for use in hosedown areas even when combustible dusts are present. AFAX series complies with requirements for use in NEC Class I areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases. AFAX series also complies with NEC requirements for use in Class II hazardous areas, or for use in NEC hazardous areas classified simultaneously as Class I and Class II. 5C Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG Electrical Rating: • Control circuit switches – 15 AMP, 600 VAC max. Ordering Information Standard Materials: Contact Arrangement Diagram • Enclosure – Feraloy® iron alloy • Bearing and operating arm – stainless steel with plastic end caps Standard Finishes: • Feraloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Stainless steel – natural Cat. # 2 normally open AFA20 2 normally closed AFAX20 Options: Description Suffix Finish: Corro-free™ epoxy powder coat – for coating outside only. S752 Typical AFA Switch Application Dimensions In Inches*: *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 573 5C NEMA 3 Raintight Wet Locations AFU Mine Signal Switches 600 VAC Applications: AFU mine signal switches are used: • For signalling circuits or remote control of magnetic motor starters • In non-hazardous areas of mines or process industry facilities where a rugged enclosure is needed for protection from falling ore and other material or dripping water • Mounted on walls or in shaft ways and actuated by pulling line or cable attached to the loop at the bottom 5C Features: • Sturdy raintight enclosure with heavy mounting lugs • Wires enter enclosure through clearance holes in the underside • Switches are actuated by a springloaded plunger which returns to the normal position when the operating force is removed • Units are furnished with heavy duty motor control push buttons. Several of these may be interconnected electrically for remote control of a magnetic motor starter from more than one location Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA: 3 AFU mine signal switch with pushbutton switch (cover removed) Ordering Information Maximum Wt. of Line or Total Operating Cable Without Actuating Force Required Switch (lbs.) (lbs.) With Pushbutton Heavy Duty 600 VAC Max. Cat. # 25 15 AFU254 AFU154 50 25 Dimensions Standard Materials: In Inches*: • Enclosure – Feraloy® iron alloy • Plunger – steel • Loop – bronze Standard Finishes: • Feraloy – electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint • Steel – electrogalvanized • Bronze – natural *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 574 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds FLEXITITE™ D2X Series Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations For Class I, Div. 2 Areas NEMA 3, 4X, 5, 6, 7BCD (Div. 2), 9FG (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Raintight Dust-tight Wet Locations Applications: Certifications and Compliances: FLEXITITE attachable pendant pushbutton stations are used: • For safe multi-function motor circuit control of: Hoists Cranes Machine Tools Electromagnets • In hazardous areas such as Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D (classified) areas or Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G, as defined by the National Electrical Code • Where wash downs are necessary – in damp, wet, dirty or corrosive locations • For control applications requiring 2 to 8 functions • NEMA: 3, 4X, 5, 6, 7BCD (Div. 2), 9FG (Div. 2), 12 • UL Standard: 1203 • CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 5C Standard Materials: • Body and cover – steel reinforced neoprene • Strain relief and reinforcement plates – stainless steel • Exterior hardware – stainless steel Standard Finishes: 5C • Neoprene – safety yellow • Stainless steel – natural Features: • Safety cushioned – neoprene encapsulation protects internal switches and connectors from impact damage and provides extra protection for personnel. • Stress relief for your cable is built-in. A separate cable grip is not needed. • Uses Cooper Crouse-Hinds ESWP factory sealed contacts suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D • Switches are rated for 10 amps 600 VAC (NEMA A600). • Indicator plates meet OSHA requirements for clear identification of functions. A full set of plates is included with each station. • Jam resistant operator buttons are raised flexible diaphragms – an integral part of the molded one-piece cover. • Compact design • Safety yellow finish. 8-Button Control Station CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 575 5C FLEXITITE™ D2X Series Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations For Class I, Div. 2 Areas NEMA 3, 4X, 5, 6, 7BCD (Div. 2), 9FG (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Raintight Dust-tight Wet Locations Ordering Information Pendant Pushbutton Stations Description Cable Dia. Cat. # 2-Button 4-Button .31 – .75 .50 – .75 D2X8635 210 D2X8635410 6-Button .59 – .81 D2X8635 610 8-Button .59 – .92 D2X8635 810 5C Replacement Indicator Plates (A full set is included with each control station) Replacement Switch 2-Button Description Cat. # Cat. # Replacement Switch ESWP126 315116 315116 315116 315116 315116 315116 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Cat. # Description Down/West Start/North Stop/South Off/In On/Out Fwd/Right 315116 7 315116 8 Rev/Left Up/East Description Cat. # 4, 6 and 8-Button Cat. # 314850 1 Bridge 314850 6 314850 2 Trolley 314850 9 314850 3 Hoist In/Out Up/Down Right/Left East/West 314850 4 314850 5 Description Fwd/Rev North/South On/Off Start/Stop CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Dimensions In Inches: 2-Button 576 www.crouse-hinds.com 4-Button US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 6-Button Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 8-Button FLEXITITE™ Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations NEMA 3, 4X, 5, 6, 12 Applications: Raintight Watertight Dust-tight Wet Locations A cable grip is used with pilot light option, and is included with kit. FLEXITITE attachable pendant pushbutton stations are used: • For safe, multi-function motor circuit control of: Hoists Cranes Machine Tools Electromagnets • Non-hazardous control environments requiring from 2 to 8 functions. • Where washdowns are necessary – in damp, wet, dirty, or corrosive locations. 5C Inside Front View 5C Features: • Safety insulated to meet OSHA requirements for enclosing live parts. The entire unit except the strain relief is insulated with neoprene. • Safety cushioned – neoprene encapsulation protects internal switches and connectors from impact damage and provides extra protection for personnel. • Stress relief for your cable is built-in. A separate cable grip is not needed unless the optional pilot light kit is used. • Positive action long life momentary contact switches. • Maintained Off-On toggle switch is optionally available on 4, 6, and 8 button units. • Jam resistant operator buttons are raised flexible diaphragms – an integral part of the molded one-piece cover. • Compact – 3" x 3" enclosure easily fits your hand. • Indicator plates meet OSHA requirements for clear identification of functions. A full set of plates is provided with each station. 1. BODY SEAL – Compresses against mating half to form a positive seal. 2. REDUCING GROMMETS – Permit use of five different cable sizes while sealing cable entrance. 3. CABLE CLAMP – Secures conductors inside switch. Transfers strain to inner steel core of switch. (Not used with pilot light.) 4. TOGGLE SWITCH (OPTIONAL) – Maintained off-on switch to control power to pendant stations. 5. GREEN GROUNDING SCREW – Makes positive contact between inner steel core and ground wire. 6. INSULATION BARRIERS – On 4- and 6-button models. Position switches and separate N.O. and N.C. switch contacts for added safety. 7. SEPARATOR – For 4- and 6-button models. Tough polypropylene sheet retains switches and forms an insulated wiring channel. STRAIN RELIEF – Integral part of the inner steel core – provides tie-off point for strain chain to relieve tension from electrical cable. ELECTRICAL INTERLOCK – Schematic furnished to wire switches against opposed operations. LOW COST, EASILY INSTALLED – Despite their many advantages, Cooper Crouse-Hinds pendant stations generally cost less than similar metal units. RAISED BUMPER – protects lens against damage caused by impact. Certifications and Compliances: • NEMA: 3, 4X, 5, 6, 12 • UL Standard: 508 • CSA Approved Standard Materials: • Body and cover – steel reinforced neoprene • Strain relief and reinforcement plates – stainless steel • Exterior hardware – stainless steel Standard Finishes: • Neoprene – safety yellow • Steel – stainless steel CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 577 FLEXITITE™ Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations 5C NEMA 3, 4X, 5, 6, 12 Raintight Watertight Dust-tight Wet Locations Ordering Information - One and Two Speed 2, 4, 6 and 8 Buttons Style 2-Button 1 Speed 2 Speed DC 20A 460V 10A 230V 10A 125V Switch* 2 hp. 230V 1/2 hp. 230V 1/8 hp. 125V Cable Diameter Shipping Weight (lbs.) Dimensions Length Width Depth None X8635 20 .555 thru .665 21/2 83/4" 21/4" 3" 3316317 X8635 41B X8635 42B X8635 40B .505 thru .730 3 131/2" 3" 35/8" 3316317 X8635 61B X8635 62B X8635 60B .590 thru .840 61/ 2 17" 3" 35/8" 3316317 X8635 81 X8635 80 .698 thru .968 9 211/2" 3" 37/16" X8635 21 X8635 22 4-Button 5C 6-Button 8-Button X8635 82§ *Should be ordered separately. §2 speed includes: 6, 2-speed switches and 2, single speed switches. Pilot Light Kit for 4, 6 and 8-Button Only Cable Diameter 4 and 6 Button FLEXITITE™ 2-Button Attachable Pendant Switch 8 Button Lamp Voltage .50 thru .62 .63 thru .74 .75 thru .87 .69 thru .97 110–125V AC 3316533 3316533 1 3316533 2 3316624 210–250V AC 3316534 3316534 1 3316534 2 3316625 Contact Style Cat. # X8995 1 Yellow Momentary Switch Pilot light kit includes: lamp assembly with lens and bulb, cable support grip, and "S" hook. Support grip and "S" hook not required on 8-button. NEMA 3,4,5,12 only. Voltage 240 AC 120 AC 24 AC 250 VDC 125 VDC Amps Make 7.5 15.0 15.0 0.27 .055 Amps Break 0.75 1.5 2.5 0.27 0.55 Indicator Plates (Replacement only – units come with plates standard) 2-Button 4, 6 and 8-Button Cat. # Description Cat. # Description Cat. # Description Cat. # Description 315116 1 Down/West 315116 7 Rev/Left 314850 1 Bridge 314850 6 Fwd/Rev. (North/South) 315116 2 Start/North 315116 8 Up/East 314850 2 Trolley 314850 9 On/Off (Start/Stop) 315116 3 Stop/South 315116 9 Raise/Lower 314850 3 Hoist 314850 12 Raise/Lower 315116 4 Off/In 315116 10 Up/Down 314850 4 In/Out (Up/Down) 314850 13 Inbd/Outbd 315116 5 On/Out 315116 11 Right/Left 314850 5 Right/Left (East/West) 314850 14 315116 6 Fwd/Right Off/On Shoulder Bolts for Fastening Front to Back Cover – 2-Button (P/N 1316311-2); 4- & 6-Button (P/N 1316311-1); 8 button (P/N 1316311-3). NOTE: Refer to price list for identification of stock items. Replacement Parts Cat. # Style Front Cover 2-Button A335578 Back Cover Switch Element Part Numbers Toggle Switch Kit† 1 Speed 20A, 460V 2hp, 230V A335577 1 Not Avail. 3316480 DC Toggle 2 speed 10A, 230V 10A, 125V Off/On 1 /2 hp. 230V 1/8 hp. 125V Element Barrier 314896 Parts Separator Kit‡ 314903 RX8635 21 4-Button 3335848 1 3335829 1 3316317 3316480 314896 314903 314849 1 1316313 (4 Req'd) 6-Button 3335845 1 3335830 1 3316317 3316480 314896 314903 314849 1 1316313 (6 Req'd) 8-Button 3344153 3316480 314896 314903 1316313 Not Req'd Not Req'd RX8635 80 3344154 3316317 †Toggle switch kit – includes: toggle switch, guard, assembly and screws. ‡Parts kit – includes cable grommets, legend plates and assembly screws. CHS Controls AB 335616 (1 Req'd) 335571 (1 Req'd) Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 578 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Pilot Light Kit Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds RX8635 41 See Above RX8635 61 Chart EGF Series Ground Fault Control Station Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations 5C Applications: EGF Series of control stations are used: • For the additional safety of personnel, and for equipment protection in remote areas. Features: Certifications and Compliances: • NEC: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 5C • Copper-free aluminum construction offers lightweight, corrosion resistance and a long, maintenance-free service life. • 11/4" throughfeed conduit hubs with 11/4"–1" reducers for ease of installation. • Compact, internally flanged enclosure requires minimum installation area. • Steel mounting feet with electroplate finish for fast, secure, and corrosionresistant mounting. • Accepts #14–#10 copper wire sizes for application flexibility. • Push-to-test button and pilot light (with 10,000 hour incandescent lamp) for easy and constant operational monitoring of unit. • Cast aluminum circuit breaker operating handle for durability during use. • EPD breakers for protection of heat tracing circuits. Ordering Information Number of Breakers Number of Poles 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 ➀Add 15, 20, 25, or 30 amp breaker rating. Milliamp Trip Cat. # 5 5 5 30 30 30 EGF11 ➀ EGF12 ➀ EGF21 ➀ EGF11EPD ➀ EGF12EPD ➀ EGF21EPD ➀ Dimensions In Inches: Standard Materials: • Bodies, covers, threaded barrels, guards, collars, and toggle operator – copperfree aluminum • Pushbuttons – type 6 / 6 nylon • Operating shafts – stainless steel Standard Finishes: • Copper-free aluminum – natural • Sheet steel – zinc electroplate with chromate finish • Stainless steel – natural Electrical Rating: • GFI, EPD breakers – 120 VAC (single pole), 120 / 240 VAC for two pole (10,000 AIC) CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 579 5C CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 580 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 6C Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives Description Page No. Explosionproof VFDs - Class I, Division 1 & 2 see page 582 ACE Series 6C CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 581 6C ACE Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7, 9 UL Listed Raintight Wet locations Multiple Patents Pending The only explosionproof VFD solution utilizing NEMA 7 with active cooling Cooper Crouse-Hinds Explosionproof VFDs are highly flexible AC drives designed specifically for hazardous area locations. These drives can be mounted next to the motor in the classified area, providing significant installation cost savings - along with the traditional VFD benefits of energy savings, speed and torque control, and system diagnostics. This Cooper Crouse-Hinds innovative product features the first ever NEMA 7 enclosure with active cooling, allowing the solution to be rated Class I, Divisions 1 and 2. 6C Applications: • Designed to match the high requirements of process industries, such as oil and gas, chemical, and mining • Pumps, compressors, fans, separators, and mixers VFD Benefits: Improved Process Control • Fine speed and torque control • Soft start capability • Improved pressure, flow, and motion control Reduced Operation and Installation Costs • Locate VFD in classified area, eliminating costly conduit/cable tray runs • Eliminate control valves • Reduced energy consumption • No additional space required in sub-station • Extract equipment condition and operating information • Lower pump maintenance costs Reliable Performance in Any Environment • Recommended temperature range: 0ºC to 50ºC (consult factory for more extreme temperature guidance) • Class I, Divisions 1 and 2 • Raintight, wet locations Certifications and Compliances: • UL Listed Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D • Standards UL 1203 cUL: CSA 22.2 No. 30 M1986 • Environmental NEMA 3, 4X, 7, 9 Raintight Wet locations Standard Materials • Enclosure - epoxy powder coated copper-free aluminum • Internal Mounting Brackets - natural cooper-free aluminum and natural stainless steel • Hinges, Hardware, Filter Assemblies - natural stainless steel • Gaskets - neoprene • Glass - tempered soda lime CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Horsepower Ratings: • Available up to 60HP • Higher HP ratings coming soon 582 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds ACE Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D UL Listed NEMA 3, 4X, 7, 9 Raintight Wet Locations 6C Multiple Patents Pending Ordering Information: Catalog Number ACE10 1 3 ACE10 2 3 ACE10 2 5 ACE10 3 6 ACE10 5 8 ACE10 5 10 ACE10 8 13 ACE10 10 17 15 20 20 30 30 23 28 32 41 46 ACE10 40 57 ACE10 50 74 ACE10 60 90 30 Disconnect Fuse Type J Output Rating (Amps) 25ºC to 40ºC Output Rating (Amps) 40ºC to 50ºC Weight 1 2.3 3.1 4.0 5.5 6.6 8.7 12 16 1.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 5.0 7.5 10 2.80 3.40 4.50 5.50 7.60 9.70 13.0 16.8 2.5 3.0 4.0 4.8 6.7 8.5 11.4 14.8 2.3 2.8 3.7 4.6 6.3 8.1 10.8 13.9 257 257 257 257 257 262 262 262 15 20 20 30 30 23 28 32 41 46 20 25 28 36 40 19 23 27 34 38 384 384 384 384 384 40 50 60 57 74 90 50 65 79 47 61 75 397 397 397 Input Enclosure Rating Size (Amps) 60 J 2 20 26 30 36 42 100 J 2 55 65 82 6C ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 Disconnect Rating (Amps) Output Rating (Amps) Nominal 0ºC Horsepower to 25ºC Data in shaded area is a preliminary approximation. Contact factory for final numbers. Options Description add suffix Communication Modules Profibus Devicenet CAN Open Modbus Ethernet CP CD CC CM CE Potentiometer AB 800H POT Example: ABB 60HP VFD, 90 continuous amps at ambient of less than 25ºC, with Ethernet Communications and a Potentiometer in cover. ACE10 60 90 CE POT CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 583 6C CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 584 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Switch Rack Assemblies Hazardous and Non-hazardous 7C Description Page No. Switch Racks see pages 586–589 see pages 590–591 see pages 592–594 General Information Bus Duct Assemblies Selection Guide 7C CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 585 7C Switch Rack Assemblies Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 7C Applications: Free-standing switch rack assemblies are used: • To provide a complete motor control center in one integrated package • Outdoors and indoors • In damp, wet or corrosive locations such as sewage treatment plants, lumber mills, marine installations, and food preparation areas • In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases, such as petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, gas gathering plants, pipeline compressor stations, and drilling rigs, both onshore and offshore • In areas where hazardous dusts are present, such as coal handling facilities, grain processing and handling plants, and certain food process industries Features: • Complete factory assembled and wired switch racks • Pre-drilled bus boxes allow for quick and easy changing or adding of components • Complete assembly covered under one order, eliminates engineering costs, additional costs of placing separate orders with several vendors for various components, and assembly and scheduling problems at job site • Wiring is simple. After switch rack is in place, feeders are connected to the main bus and connections made from starters motors. No other field wiring is necessary • Maintenance time and costs are reduced by having controls grouped. Work is performed in one location instead of moving from one control to another in various locations • Major components are standard EBM, EPC, NMC, NMG, NCB, FLB, D2PB, EXD, D2D, EPL, and D2L enclosures featuring ready access to starters and breakers for inspection and maintenance • Custom built racks to meet your exact requirements are a Cooper CrouseHinds specialty. Complete quotations will be supplied for any job, large or small (38' length max) Certifications and Compliances: • NEC: Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups C, D (Group B optional) Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III • NEMA: 3, 4X (optional), 7B (optional) CD, 9EFG, 12 Standard Materials: Standard Finishes: • Rack frame – hot dip galvanized steel or natural aluminum • Components – see sections A & C for finishes Options: • Rack frame finish – corrosion resistant primer with air dry epoxy • Options listed for individual components can be incorporated in complete switch racks • Rack frames – structural steel or aluminum channel members, bolted and welded • Components – see sections A & C for material CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 586 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Switch Rack Assemblies Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Construction: Rack Frame Design: Main Bus Equipment: General: Structure: • All construction to be in accordance with current National Electrical Code® (NEC), National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA), state and local standards as designated by the purchaser. • All hazardous area enclosures for motor starters, combination motor starters, circuit breakers, motor circuit protectors, instrument enclosures, panelboards, main bus, fittings, receptacles, and lighting fixtures shall be made and supplied by the manufacturer. • All explosionproof threaded enclosures for combination starters, circuit breakers, motor circuit protectors, and starters shall be UL classified. • All other standard hazardous area enclosures shall be UL listed or UL classified. • Motor control racks shall be constructed by an approved union shop. • Manufacturer shall retain permanent records of all motor control racks and shall have the capability of duplicating, or replacing, any fully-assembled rack or rack component. • Manufacturer to assume responsibility for construction, purchase/manufacturer of components, complete circuit continuity testing, and testing of mechanical functions of components. • Switch rack, either single or double face as required, shall be rigid, free-standing structures. Racks shall be factorywelded, assembled and fabricated from standard rolled structural steel or aluminum shapes. • Vertical risers will be 6" I-beam and horizontal members shall be 6-inch channel. • Mounting feet shall be 6-inch channel. Width of such feet for single-sided racks shall be 41 inches. • End mounting feet will be braced (welded) to the upright with 6" T member. • Mounting feet shall be anchored at the job site with 1-inch diameter bolts. Anchor bolts and mounting pads will be the responsibility of the user. • Maximum horizontal spacing between mounting legs shall not exceed 6 feet. (Specific dimensions to be determined by the manufacturer.) • Racks longer than 20 feet will be supplied as bolt-together sections. (Specific section dimensions to be determined by the manufacturer.) Class I, Division 1: • Main bus material shall be copper only and capable of withstanding up to 65K amps fault current. Cable bus will be wired to terminal blocks enclosed in cast, copper-free aluminum, explosionproof junction boxes, Cooper Crouse-Hinds type EJB. Such junction boxes for incoming power and distribution wiring shall be provided at either the top or bottom of the rack. Enclosures shall be connected by rigid conduit with conduit seals installed in accordance with the NEC. Load conduit or cable will leave rack either below or above. Manufacturer shall provide conduit layouts. Class I, Division 2: • Main bus material shall be copper only and capable of withstanding up to 65K amps fault current. Cable bus will be wired to terminal blocks enclosed in cast, copper-free aluminum weathertight junction boxes, Cooper Crouse-Hinds type WJB. Such junction boxes for incoming power and distribution wiring shall be provided at either the top or bottom of the rack. Enclosures shall be connected by rigid conduit with conduit seals installed as required by the NEC. Load conduit or cable will leave rack either below or above. Manufacturer shall provide conduit layouts. Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight • A pressure-type grounding lug with appropriate wire capacity will be provided at each end of frame. Finish: • Rack frame shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or natural aluminum. 7C Grounding: 7C Bus Duct in Lieu of Junction Boxes (Optional): • Cable bus will be wired to a weathertight bus duct provided at the top or bottom of the rack. Canopy (Optional): • Single- or double-pitched canopy shall have minimum 15-degree pitch with a minimum 7'6" ground clearance, and 2foot overhang. Roofing material shall be corrugated aluminum. Canopy roof trusses, cross channels, roof material, and mounting hardware shall be shipped unassembled for quick assembly at the job site. All holes in structure shall be provided except for roof mounting holes which will be drilled in the field. Manufacturer will supply drawings and material for complete field assembly of canopy. CHS Controls AB Cooper Crouse-Hinds switch rack installed in a fuel storage area. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 587 7C Switch Rack Assemblies 7C Motor Control Components: Explosionproof Quick Opening Enclosures: • All circuit breakers, motor circuit protectors and combination or acrossthe-line motor starters shall be enclosed in quick-opening enclosures (Cooper Crouse-Hinds types EBM or EPC). Types: • Ground joint bolted cover enclosure shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds type EBM, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. classified for use in Class I, Groups C, D, Divisions 1 and 2, Class II, Groups E, F, G, Divisions 1 and 2 and Class III hazardous locations and shall also be suitable for Type 3, 3R and/or Type 4 (NEMA 3, 3R and 4) areas. • All enclosures shall be cast of a corrosion-resistant copper-free aluminum alloy (less than 0.4% copper) and shall be of a semi clamshell design with external flange to promote ease of apparatus installation, adjustment and maintenance. Most importantly, enclosure inside dimensions shall conform to the wire bending space requirements of the National Electrical code NFPA70 paragraph 373-6. Enclosures with flat covers, internal flanges or those not conforming to NFPA70 paragraph 373-6 are not permitted. • Covers shall be hinged on the left side and, when closed, shall be affixed top the body by multiple lead thread bolts to promote quick opening and closing of the enclosure. • Cover bolts shall be hex head stainless steel without screwdriver slots, to promote the use of a socket or wrench for proper tightening. They shall be captive to the cover and stainless steel spring loaded to indicate the fully unthreaded position. Spring loading shall give visual indication that the bolts are free of the body when the cover is being opened. The cover flange ground joint shall have an integeral gasket to prevent the entry of windblown dust, rain or sleet. • All enclosures shall be fitted, as standard, with adjustable, extended, corrosion-resistant, copper-free aluminum hinges that shall allow the cover to swing away from the body when opened and shall permit unobstructed working space for maintenance, adjustment or replacement of the internal apparatus. Additionally these hinges shall allow minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between an open cover and an adjacent enclosure. Enclosures with hinges fabricated from steel or aluminum stampings shall not be permitted. • All enclosures shall be provided with drilled, tapped and plugged conduit entrances suitably sized for the electrical application. Power conduit entrances shall be located 1 (or 2) each on (or equally spaced from) the enclosure vertical centerline at top and bottom. A single, plugged 1" entrance for a control conduit shall be provided at the bottom of the enclosure. (Some enclosures can also be provided with a plugged 1" entrance for control conduit at the top.) • All conduit entrances shall be furnished with removable copper-free aluminum reducers, each with integral wire pulling bushing. All conduit entrances shall be located the same distance from the enclosure mounting surface to facilitate conduit run layout and/or stub up construction. • All enclosures shall have rugged, cast copper-free aluminum circuit breaker and motor starter overload reset operating handles located on the right side of the enclosure. These handles shall operate the internal mechanisms via stainless steel, gasketed shafts and bearings through the side wall of the body. Correct circuit breaker and overload reset operation shall be visually confirmed with the cover open. • Circuit breaker handles shall be padlockable in either the "OFF" or "ON" position, and shall be trip-free of the circuit breaker itself. An attached indicating plate shall give clear, visual confirmation of the circuit breaker status. • Adjustable circuit breaker handle stops shall be provided to ensure full operation of the circuit breaker and to prevent handle overthrow that could damage the circuit breaker toggle. • Motor starter overload reset operating mechanisms shall be field adjustable. • Threaded construction enclosures shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds type EPC, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. classified for use in Class I, Groups C, D, Divisions 1 and 2, Class II, Groups E, F, G Divisions 1 and 2 and Class III hazardous locations and shall also be suitable for Type 3, 3R and/or Type 4 (NEMA 3, 3R and 4) areas. • All enclosures shall be cast of a corrosion-resistant copper-free aluminum alloy (less than 0.4% copper) and shall be of a three section design. Multiple-start straight buttress threads between the covers and the body shall ensure quick access to the interior in less than two full turns of the covers. A system of stops shall prevent overtightening and thread seizing. A system of locks shall prevent covers from loosening due to external vibration. • Female threads on the top cover with male threads on the bottom cover shall ensure inherent water and rain shedding. • All exposed screws, bolts and hardware shall be stainless steel. • The external circuit breaker operating handle affixed to a stainless steel shaft, shall be padlockable in either the "ON" or "OFF" position with up to three padlocks. Circuit breaker mechanisms shall be trip-free of the circuit breaker itself to allow the circuit breaker to open under overload conditions even if it is locked in the "ON" position. • The mounting bracket shall provide a three-point suspension system for quick installation and adjustment. • Conduit entrances shall have integral wire pulling bushings and conduit stops. These openings shall be arranged two at the top and two at the bottom and shall be sized for power and control requirements. General: • All enclosures shall be bolted to the horizontal frame members on either the front or back or both front and back. Enclosures shall be connected to the main bus via conduit seals. (To be field poured). All hardware used to mount the enclosures shall be stainless steel. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 588 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Switch Rack Assemblies Lighting Panelboards: Conduit Boxes, Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes: Wiring: • Conduit boxes, outlet boxes, and device boxes shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds Condulet® fittings. Seals: • Seals will be standard Cooper CrouseHinds type Condulet EYS. (Cooper Crouse-Hinds Condulet EYD drains to be specified as required.) Unions: • Unions will be Cooper Crouse-Hinds UNY. Breathers and Drains: • Breathers and drains shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds ECD. • Standard wire shall be copper only, 600 volt, 75°C minimum rating, UL listed. • No power wire less than 12AWG shall be used. • Control wire shall be 14AWG minimum, 7 strands, THW minimum. • Wiring shall be sized in accordance with the NEC requirements. Drawings: • Standard drawings supplied for customer approval shall include complete rack wiring diagram, component data, nominal weight of the rack, and overall rack dimensions. 7C Class I, Division 1: • Panelboards shall be Cooper CrouseHinds type, factory-sealed EXD or EPL as specified and shall meet the following electrical ratings: EPL – 1, 2 or 3 pole, 240 volt maximum, 100 amp maximum branch trip rating, 10,000 AIC. EXD – 1, 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt maximum, 100 amp maximum branch trip rating. Class I, Division 2: • Lighting panelboard shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds type D2L factory-sealed, 120 / 240 volt panelboards and be provided with single-pole, two-pole, or three-pole branch circuit breakers with up to 100 amp trip rating; main breaker ranging to 225 amp. Similarly, lighting panelboard shall be type D2PB factorysealed, 120 / 240 volt panelboards and be provided with single-pole or two-pole factory sealed circuit breakers with 15, 20 or 30 amp trip ratings and maximum 10,000 AIC. Power panelboards type D2D factory-sealed, up to 600 volt are provided with single-pole, two-pole, or three-pole branch circuit breakers with up to 100 amp trip ratings; main breaker rating to 225 amp. 7C NEMA 4X Option: • All bus boxes, control enclosures and lighting panelboards will be made of KRYDON® material to meet NEMA 4X requirements. Fittings: • All fittings shall be made and provided by the manufacturer. Seals and unions will be provided for each incoming and outgoing conduit as required. All interconnections between components shall be done by the manufacturer with galvanized rigid conduit, and conduit fittings as required to meet the hazardous classification. Interconnecting conduits to be provided with conduit seals as required. All incoming and outgoing rack conduit entrances shall include conduit seals as required by the hazardous location specified. Such seals will be provided by the manufacturer and will not be filled where field wiring is to be introduced. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 589 7C NEMA 3R Up to 600 Volts Bus Duct (Termination Box) Assemblies Applications: Features: • Cooper Crouse-Hinds is now offering NEMA 3R, UL Listed Bus Duct (Termination Box) Assemblies as standard product. Up to 600V, three-phase, 3 or 4 wire, 400Amp or 600Amp service with short circuit ratings of 25K or 50K. • Bus ducts or termination boxes provide a means of tapping feeder circuits for power distribution on outdoor switchrack assemblies or indoor wall-mounted applications. • Typical application is primarily for bus replacements on existing switchrack installations. New applications may include on-site construction of switchracks or indoor feeder distribution points due to space confinements making local installation more practical. • • • • • • • 7C • • • • • • • • • • • • UL Listed. NEMA 3R. Maximum voltage rating 600V. 400Amp or 600Amp @ 25KAIC or 50KAIC. External flange on bus duct enclosure and lip on covers prevents water leakage and allows covers to hang freely for ease of installation and maintenance. 3 degree pitch at top, for water run-off, on all flush mounted bottom entry designs. Chorosulfonated polyethlene (Hypalon®) gasket material at all bus box section joints, covers and end plates. Standoff (Glastic) insulators moulded of (UL) recognized flameresistant fiberglass-reinforced thermoset polyester moulding compound. Bus bar sizing and bracing complies to UL857 requirements. All welded construction - sheet aluminum, sheet steel (galvanized), or stainless steel. Stainless steel hardware throughout. Two hole compression lugs at all power phase connectors attatched with stainless steel hardware. One (1) drain is standard per bus duct section (typical 4 foot sections). Solid copper bus bars (tin, silver plated and/or insulated – optional per customer request). Solid copper ground bar – standard. Incoming main lugs – supplied size and location specified with customer. Space heaters – optional per customer request. Pre-drilled copper bars (when specified by customer). Conduit entries for Myers hubs – optional per customer request. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 590 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Bus Duct (Termination Box) Catalog Numbering System 7C 7C CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 591 7C Switch Rack Assemblies Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 7C Selection Guide Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 592 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Switch Rack Assemblies Selection Guide Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 7C 7C ‡ Not available with D2PB panelboards. CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 593 7C Switch Rack Assemblies Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight 7C Selection Guide Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 CHS Controls AB Florettgatan 33 SE-254 67 Helsingborg, Sweden Tel +46 42 38 61 00, Fax +46 42 38 61 29 chs@chscontrols.se www.chscontrols.se 594 www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Author : mabe Create Date : 2010:08:23 15:45:59+05:30 GTS PDFX Conformance : PDF/X-1a:2001 GTS PDFX Version : PDF/X-1:2001 Modify Date : 2011:05:27 15:57:55+02:00 Trapped : False XMP Toolkit : 3.1-701 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.0.0 (Windows) Creator Tool : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2 Title : 1_427.qxp Creator : mabe Page Count : 168EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools